JP2014097357A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing the degree of attention to a play.SOLUTION: An MPU 92 of a main controller 71 executes a winning lottery on the basis of the entrance of a game ball into an upper actuation hole or lower actuation hole disposed in a play area, and shifts the game state to an opening/closing execution mode to allow the game ball to enter variable winning devices disposed in the play area when the result of the winning lottery is a prescribed result. Plural types of modes are set in the opening/closing execution mode, and plural types of shifting modes of the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are set as well. In this case, external output through an external terminal board 81 is delayed in accordance with the kind of the opening/closing execution mode and the shifting mode thereafter.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine performs a lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a transition of a gaming state such as a transition to a winning state occurs when the lottery result is a predetermined result To do. In addition, in order to be able to perform gaming machine management in a gaming hall, a configuration is known in which information for causing a gaming machine to recognize its own gaming state is output to a gaming hall management computer or the like (for example, Patent Documents). 1).

  For example, when the gaming machine outputs a signal indicating that it is in a winning state, the management computer can grasp that the gaming machine is in a winning state. Then, when an illegal act that causes a large amount of game media to be paid out is performed, a game hall indicates that a large amount of game media is being paid out even though a signal indicating that the winning state has not been issued. It is possible for the administrator to recognize this, and it is possible to prevent the cheating from being continued for a long period of time.

  In addition, for example, there is a known game hall in which counter displays are arranged in parallel for each gaming machine, and the number of transitions such as a hit state is displayed in a counter according to the signal output from the gaming machine. It is made to notify by a vessel. In this case, the player can select a gaming machine in which he / she plays with reference to the contents notified by the counter display.

JP 2009-39323 A

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-mentioned examples, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
A game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and a specific entrance part configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a determination result corresponding to shifting the gaming state, state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state;
A recognition means used to make the management means outside the gaming machine recognize that the transition of the gaming state has been performed;
Recognizing control means for setting the state of the recognizing means to a recognizable state or recognizable non-recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed;
With
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The state transition means includes
When the determination result of the transition determination unit is the first determination result, the expectation degree is relatively high after the first section in which the expectation degree of granting the predetermined privilege proceeds in a relatively low aspect. Means for transitioning the gaming state to the first specific gaming state in which the proceeding second section occurs;
Means for shifting the gaming state to a second specific gaming state in which the first section of the first section and the second section occurs when the determination result of the transition determining means is a second determination result;
With
When the second determination result is obtained in the low frequency switching mode, the switching mode after the second specific gaming state is the low frequency switching mode, and when the second determination result is obtained in the high frequency switching mode, The switching mode after the second specific gaming state is configured to be the high-frequency switching mode,
The recognition control means includes
When the determination result of the transition determination means is the first determination result, the recognition is disabled in at least part of the first section, and the recognition is enabled in at least part of the second section. Means for controlling the means for recognition;
Means for controlling the recognition means so that the unrecognizable state is continued when the determination result of the transition determination means in the low frequency switching mode is the second determination result;
When the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result in the high-frequency switching mode, the recognition is disabled in at least a part of the first section until the second specific gaming state is ended. Means for controlling the means for recognition so as to be in a recognizable state;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to a game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. (A) The front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating a variable prize apparatus. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for rounds performed with MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening process performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation determination process for opening-and-closing execution modes performed by MPU of a voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. (A) Explanatory drawing which shows data table of production A1, (b) Explanatory drawing which shows the data table of production A2, (c) Explanatory drawing which shows the data table of production A3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various game results. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the content of each opening / closing execution mode. It is the schematic for demonstrating the outline | summary of the electrical structure of the game hall in which many pachinko machines were installed. (A) Rear view of the pachinko machine showing the external terminal board and its periphery enlarged, (b) An explanatory view for explaining an external output buffer provided in the RAM of the main controller, (c) of the external terminal board It is a block diagram for demonstrating an electrical structure. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of the mode transition performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process for a delay performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed in MPU of a hall computer. (A) Timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the external output in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D, (b) Explaining the execution timing of the external output in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A shifted from the low frequency support mode. It is a timing chart. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the external output in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the fact that the explicit high probability hit result A is obtained. 12 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of external output in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of the mode transition performed by MPU of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed in MPU of a hall computer. It is a flowchart which shows the reception confirmation process of the 1st-3rd signal performed with MPU of a hall computer. (A) The flowchart which shows the output process of the management data performed by MPU of a hall computer, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the data extracted from the management data in the hall computer. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening process performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed in MPU of a hall computer.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board 24, and FIG. 4B is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the variable winning device 32 provided on the game board 24. FIG.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper working port (first starting ball entering portion) 33, a lower working port (second starting ball entering portion) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, A main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, when a ball enters the upper working port 33 and when a ball enters the lower working port 34, the payout of three prize balls is executed. When it occurs, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a prize is entered into the variable winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in both the operation holes 33, 34 is larger than the number of prize balls in the lower action opening 34 than the number of prize balls in the upper action opening 33. It may be different. Further, the number of winning balls related to the variable winning device 32 is not limited to a configuration that is larger than the number of other winning balls, and may be configured to be smaller than the number of winning balls related to the general winning opening 31, for example.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35 are entered. The entry of a game ball is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 is on the upper side. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric combination 34a is connected to an electric combination driving unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric combination driving unit 34b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot be won in the lower operation port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to win the lower operation port 34.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a motorized state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 34 is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which winning is not impossible but is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the accessory 34a is switched. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be omitted, and switching between a state in which a winning is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur is performed by the displacement of the lower operation port 34 itself.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. . The open / close door 32b is connected to a variable winning drive unit 32c provided integrally as the variable winning device 32 (the connection portion is not shown), and is driven by the variable winning drive unit 32c to be in a closed state and an open state. It is arranged in either. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot win, and the game ball can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win when it is elected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery. By the way, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that is shifted to when a big win or a special loss occurs. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  In the main display unit 43, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning at the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display unit 43 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 43. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 43 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning to the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variably displaying a symbol which is a kind of a symbol (or variable display or switching display), and a center frame 42 is provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41. Has been. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

  In the symbol display device 41, the variation display of the symbol is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly.

  The display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display screen G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5.

  When an effect for game times is performed on the display screen G based on winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the game is used in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The production of is ended.

  In addition, when the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of the most advantageous jackpot result, which will be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same odd number is attached to any active line is formed. If the game times correspond to the occurrence of a predetermined low probability winning result to be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same even number is attached to any one of the active lines is formed. Further, if the game times correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, which is different from these, a combination of predetermined symbols is formed, although it is not a combination of symbols with the same numerals. The contents of each game result will be described later.

  In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33 and 34, the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 start the variable display, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time.

  Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, a first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the main display portion 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided at the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of reservations is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 42, a second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed when the second holding lamp unit 46 is turned on. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance lamp | ramp part 45 and 46 is fulfill | performed by the display in a partial area | region of the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG.

  An inner rail portion 48 and an outer rail portion 49 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and is stored in a launch rail 52 extending toward the guide rail and an upper plate 61a described later. A ball feeding device 53 that supplies game balls onto the launch rail 52 and a solenoid 54 that is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail 52 toward the guide rail are provided. By operating a firing handle 55 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 54 is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 56 so that almost the entire gaming area can be viewed from the front. The window part 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 57 is fitted therein. The window panel 57 is colorless and transparent formed of glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed colorless and transparent of synthetic resin, and the game area is visually recognized through the window panel 57 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. If possible, it may be colored and transparent.

  Around the window portion 56, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 58 is provided above the window part 56 as a part of various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 58, speaker units 59 for outputting sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 bulging toward the front side are arranged in parallel. An upper plate 61 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 51 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 62a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 61a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 for controlling the main game, and voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) are controlled. A voice light emission control device 72 is mounted.

  In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening | release to the board | substrate box 71a of the main control apparatus 71, or leaving the trace of the open | release. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is bonded when peeled off A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 71a can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 71 and the sound emission controller 72. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism 74 and a control device assembly unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73.

  The payout mechanism unit 74 includes a tank 76 in which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 77 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 76. The game balls paid out from the payout device 77 are discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 77. The payout mechanism 74 is provided with a back pack substrate having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 75 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by a payout control device 78 having a function of controlling the payout device 77 and various control devices and the like, and a game associated with the operation of the launch handle 55 by the player A power supply and launch control device 79 for controlling the launch of the ball. The payout control device 78 and the power supply / launch control device 79 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 78 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The back pack 73 is provided with an external terminal plate 81 in addition to the payout mechanism 74 and the control device assembly unit 75. The external terminal plate 81 is installed at the upper corner of the back pack unit 15 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and on the upper corner. The external terminal board 81 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal so that the management computer of the game hall recognizes the state of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the external terminal board 81 will be described later.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 71 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 95 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 71.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 95 and a payout control device 78 provided in the main control device 71 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 95 is connected to a power source and a launch control device 79 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 92 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 95.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Each of the various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e is provided with a one-to-one detection with respect to a winning-corresponding pitched portion such as a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, and a through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 92 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. Further, the MPU 92 executes various lotteries based on winnings in the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34.

  A power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 78, and a sound emission control device 72 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 78 based on a winning determination result for the winning-corresponding winning portion. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 72. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 92, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display unit. 43 and the display part 44 for an accessory are connected. The main control board 91 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. In addition, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34b so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 92. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be opened is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 92.

  In addition, an external terminal board 81 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 sets information according to the progress of the game in the external output buffer 94d provided in the RAM 94. Then, according to the information set in the external output buffer 94d, signal output setting is performed on the external terminal board 81, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer HC of the game hall. The contents of such setting will be described later.

  The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power source and launch control device 79, and monitors the voltage of 24 VDC which is the maximum voltage output from the power source and launch control device 79. The payout control device 78 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 77 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 71.

  The power source and launch control device 79 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 91 and the payout control device 78 and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 79 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is the main power supply unit. The storage holding power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 71. The power supply and launch control device 79 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 72 includes a sound emission control board 101 on which the MPU 102 is mounted. The MPU 102 includes a ROM 103 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 103 is executed. A RAM 104, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. The MPU 102 controls driving of the various lamp units 45, 46, 58 and the speaker unit 59 based on the command received from the main control device 71 and transmits the command to the display control device 111.

  The display control device 111 includes a display control board 112 on which an MPU 113 that is an element in which a program ROM 114 and a work RAM 115 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 116, a character ROM 117, and a video RAM 118 are mounted. It has.

  The MPU 113 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 72 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 116 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 116).

  The program ROM 114 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 113 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when holding the stored information. The work RAM 115 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 113, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 116 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 116 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 116 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 116 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 113, the video RAM 118, etc., and intervenes in reading and writing data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 118 from the character ROM 117 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 117 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 117 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 118 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 118.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 92 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of the display of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variation type counter for determining the display continuation time in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is acquired information in the RAM 94 when a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 occurs. It is stored in a holding ball storage area 94a provided as a storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 94a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The combination of numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are stored on hold. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to specify the number in which the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when the variable display on the main display unit 43 is started. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric utility reservation area 94c of the RAM 94 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the electric accessory 34a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in an open state per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electrified open state is elected is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., the next time that the electric component opening lottery is performed after the first electric component opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode (that is, The one display continuation time in the accessory display 44 is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (e.g., on the display part 44 for an accessory based on a winning to the through gate 35) that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character releasing lottery is performed once. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the first electric character releasing lottery is shortened, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability. .

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 93a as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 93. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the success / failure tables include a low probability mode success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 9 (a) and a high probability mode success / failure table (high) in FIG. 9 (b). Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 9 (a), the value of the random number for winning the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 9B, the value of the random number for winning the big hit is 21. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and the jackpot random number to be a big win in the situation of the low probability mode The value group of the counter C1 may be configured to include only a part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode, or may not be included.

  In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the random number value which is a big win, but in this pachinko machine 10, the special result (small hit result) and the normal result are given as the result. Are set. Neither special failure result nor normal failure result will trigger the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode or support mode, but the special failure result will trigger the switching to the opening / closing execution mode, while the normal failure result will switch to the opening / closing execution mode. It will not be an opportunity for transition.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 93b as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 93. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot result is assigned to a low likelihood big hit result A (or sudden normal big hit result), a low likelihood big hit result B (or normal jump-up big hit result), a low likelihood big hit result C (or normal) Jackpot result), implicit high probability jackpot result A (or latent probability variation jackpot result), implicit high probability jackpot result B (or latent probability variation jump-up jackpot result), explicit high probability jackpot result A (or sudden probability variation jackpot result), An explicit high-probability jackpot result B (or first sudden jump-up jackpot result), an explicit high-probability jackpot result C (or second sudden jump-up jackpot result), and the most advantageous jackpot result are set. A jackpot type counter C2 is assigned to each jackpot result so as not to overlap each other.

  Each of these jackpot results has three types: (1) content related to the opening / closing execution mode, (2) content related to the success / failure lottery mode after completion of the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) content related to the support mode after completion of the opening / closing execution mode. At least one of the contents is different. Details thereof will be described later.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the final stop result becomes the assignment corresponding result in a game round that is a predetermined jackpot result. In the gaming machine, in order to make the player think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to be the assignment correspondence result before the stop result is derived and displayed after the display of the variable display of the symbol (pattern) on the symbol display device 41 is started. The display state of In addition, about the assignment | correspondence corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining combinations in that state are displayed. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result or the special loss result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the combination is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the result of normal losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 93 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If executed.

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 71 but by the sound emission controller 72. In this case, in the sound emission control device 72, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results or the special loss results are more likely to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the normal loss results, and the appearance rate The lottery process for displaying the notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that a low notice display is likely to occur. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 92 determines the display continuation time on the main display unit 43 and the symbol display continuation time on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation display is determined at the start of variation display in the main display unit 43 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41.

<About various processes executed by main controller 71>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed in order to advance the game in the MPU 92 in the main controller 71 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 92 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 92 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. In the reading process, the states of the various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are read, the states of the various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are determined, and the winning detection information is stored. Further, when a winning of the game ball is detected by the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e corresponding to the generation of the winning ball, a winning ball command for instructing the payout control device 78 to pay out the winning ball is set. To do. For example, when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is detected, a winning ball command for instructing 15 winning balls as a specific unit number is set. In the subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 94.

  In subsequent step S104, a through winning process is performed in accordance with winning through the through gate 35. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area 94c is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 94c. Moreover, the process for making the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 72 light the 2nd reservation lamp | ramp part 46 corresponding to the number of articles | goods reservation memory | storage is performed.

  After that, in step S105 to step S108, a winning process for the operation port is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, first, in step S105, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. If no winning has occurred, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  If a winning has occurred, in step S106, is the start hold storage number NA stored in the hold number storage area NA of the hold ball storage area 94a less than an upper limit (for example, “4”)? Determine whether or not. If the start pending storage number NA is the upper limit value, the timer interruption process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number NA is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S107.

  In step S107, the start pending storage number NA is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S108, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 94a as holding information. In this case, the data is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the current start reserved memory number. Further, a process for lighting the first hold lamp unit 45 corresponding to the number of start hold memories is executed for the sound emission control device 72. After executing the process of step S108, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 78. In addition, when an effect command such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times or a command corresponding to an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is set, the command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72. Further, the output setting for the external terminal board 81 is performed according to the information set in the external output buffer 94d of the RAM 94. Such processing will be described in detail later.

  In the subsequent step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 94.

  In subsequent step S203, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In the game times control processing, determination of success / failure and distribution determination are performed, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S204, a game state transition process is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a succeeding step S205, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role release indicating whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a using the numerical information acquired from the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 94c of the RAM 94. A lottery is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 34a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric character release lottery.

  Here, as already described, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the modes of support by the electric accessory 34a, and the transition to one of the support modes is performed in the gaming state transition process. Is called. In this case, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not set.

  In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94. In the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state is set larger than in the low-frequency support mode. Set a longer opening time. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

  In a succeeding step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch period is set on condition that a launch permission signal output from the power source and launch control device 79 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the launch handle 55. The solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 51 is excited once (for example, 0.6 sec). Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 94. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 95 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 95 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 92, and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 207 that the power failure flag has been set, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption process from step S211 is executed. That is, in step S211, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S212. After the access to the RAM 94 is prohibited in step S213, the power supply is completely shut off and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. When in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processing after step S302, that is, the game turn start processing in steps S303 to S305 and the game turn progress processing in steps S306 to S310. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. When the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn starting process in steps S303 to S305. In the processing for starting game times, first, in step S303, the number-of-holds storage area NA of the hold-ball storage area 94a is referred to and the start-hold storage number NA, which is the number of hold information stored on hold, is “0”. Determine whether. The case where the start hold storage number NA is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 94a. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number NA is not “0”, a data setting process is executed in step S304.

  In the data setting process, first, the start pending storage number NA is decremented by one. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 94a is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed.

  This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In the data setting process, a process for causing the sound emission control device 72 to recognize that the hold information has been shifted and changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 45 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold is executed. To do.

  After executing the data setting process, the game start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S305. Here, the variation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, a validity determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 93a, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, It is determined whether or not the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the high-probability jackpot numerical information, and if it does not match the jackpot numerical information, does it match the special outlier numerical information? Determine whether or not. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical value relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 93a. It is determined whether or not the information matches the low probability jackpot numerical information. If the information does not match the jackpot numerical information, it is determined whether or not the information matches the special outlier numerical information.

  In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S401 is a jackpot winning result. If it is a big win result, a distribution determination process is executed in step S403.

  In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information related to the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 93b, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information relating to the grasped jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, low likelihood jackpot result A, low likelihood jackpot result B, low likelihood jackpot result C, non-explicit high jackpot result A, implicit high probability jackpot result B, explicit high likelihood jackpot result A, explicit high jackpot result It is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the result B, the explicit high probability jackpot result C, and the most advantageous jackpot result.

  In the subsequent step S404, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game times related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 93 in advance, The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. In the jackpot result stop result table, the types of patterns stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are set differently for each jackpot result type. In step S404, the type of pattern is specified in step S403. Information on the pattern mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 94.

  Note that the information on the type of the picture to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the type counter C2. In this case, the pattern mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each game result, and a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each game result.

  In the subsequent step S405, processing for setting a flag in the RAM 94 according to the type of jackpot result specified in step S403 is executed. Specifically, the low-accuracy A flag is set when the low-accuracy hit result A is specified, and the low-accuracy B flag is set when the low-accuracy hit result B is specified. The low probability C flag is set when it is specified that the likelihood winning result C is specified, and the implicit A flag is set when it is specified that the implicit high probability winning result A is specified. If the result B is specified, the implicit B flag is set. If the result is the explicit high likelihood hit result A, the explicit A flag is set, and the result is the explicit high probability hit result B. If an explicit B flag is set, an explicit C flag is set if it is specified to be an explicit high probability jackpot result C, and it is most advantageous if it is specified to be the most advantageous jackpot result. Set flags That. In the following description, whether or not the various jackpot results are determined is determined by determining whether or not a flag corresponding to the RAM 94 is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, it is determined in step S406 whether or not the result of the determination process in step S401 is a special outage result. If the result is special, the process proceeds to step S407.

  In step S407, a stop result setting process for a special loss result is executed. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game round related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the special loss result stored in the ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result. In a succeeding step S408, processing for setting a special out flag in the RAM 94 is executed.

  If it is determined in step S406 that the result is not a special loss result, a stop result setting process for a normal loss result is executed in step S409. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game round related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the special loss result stored in the ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the special loss result.

  After executing any one of steps S405, S408, and S409, display continuation time (display continuation period) setting processing is executed in step S410.

  In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 94 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current fluctuation is the most advantageous big hit result or the low probability big hit result C, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, even when neither the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result C is present, it is not the other jackpot result or special outlier result, but further numerical information relating to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE. Is numerical information corresponding to reach occurrence, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that reach display occurs, display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 93 and displayed. The duration information is set in a display duration counter provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the ROM 93. The display duration information is set in the display duration counter. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display duration information when no reach occurs is set so that the display duration is shorter as the number of the start pending storage numbers NA is larger. In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach mode is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the display duration time does not vary according to the start pending storage number NA and the support mode may be used, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, special out-of-order results, out-of-reach cases, and non-reach normal out-of-reach results, a display duration table may be set individually. In this case, the display duration time is allocated according to each game result.

  After executing the display continuation time setting process in step S410, a change command and a type command are set in step S411. The change command includes display duration information. Here, the display duration obtained by referring to the display non-occurrence display duration table as described above is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the display occurrence time table for reach occurrence. Even if the information on whether or not reach has occurred is not included in the command for use, the audio light emission control device 72 as the sub-side control device can identify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the display duration time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. In other words, in the type command, as the information of the game result, the information of the low probability big hit result A, the information of the low likelihood big hit result B, the information of the low likelihood big hit result C, the information of the implicit high probability big hit result A, the hidden high Information on the jackpot result B, information on the explicit jackpot result A, information on the explicit jackpot result B, information on the explicit jackpot result C, information on the most favorable jackpot result, information on the special missed result, and normal miss Contains result information.

  The variation command and type command set in step S411 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Processing in the sound emission control device 72 by receiving these commands will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S411, the main display unit 43 starts to display the variation of the picture in step S412. Thereafter, in step S413, after executing the external output canceling process, the fluctuation starting process is terminated. The contents of the external output cancellation process will be described later in detail.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 13), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S306 to S310 is executed.

  In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the display duration time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the display duration information stored in the display duration counter of the RAM 94 is “0”. As described above, the display duration information value is set in the display duration setting process (step S410). Further, the value of the set display duration information is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started.

  If the display continuation time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the display mode in the main display unit 43 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the display continuation time has elapsed, a change end process is executed in step S308. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 94 is specified in any one of steps S404, S407, and S409 of the change start process (FIG. 14) executed when starting the currently executed game round. The main display unit 43 is controlled so that the pattern mode corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 43.

  Here, the mode of the pattern that is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is different for each game result. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually check the game result of the game round by visually checking the main display unit 43 at the end of the game round. For example, the pachinko machine 10 exhibits the same behavior as the jackpot result. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not an illegal act to be performed is performed. On the other hand, the display range of the main display unit 43 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Further, the mode of the pattern that is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is compared at least with various jackpot results and special loss results. In this case, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, the player is expected to check the game result of the game times not from the main display unit 43 but from the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the degree of attention to the display screen G is increased.

  In the subsequent step S309, a change end command is set. The change end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 72 executes a process for ending the effect in the game times based on the reception of the change end command. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game times independently in the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 72 or the display control apparatus 111, without transmitting a change end command.

  Thereafter, in step S310, after executing the external output setting process for the number of games, this game number control process is terminated. The contents of the external output setting process for the number of games will be described later in detail.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 43 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S503 whether or not the game result of the game times that have been finished this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result or special out-of-game result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S504 whether or not the current game result is a special outage result. If the result is a special loss result, in step S505, the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 is one end condition of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special loss result. “9” is set as the upper limit number. In step S506, “15” is set in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. The open / close counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 92 to specify the number of times to open and close the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32.

  On the other hand, if the result is not a special loss result, that is, if it is any jackpot result, “15” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S507. The round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 92 to specify the number of round games to be executed within the range of one opening / closing execution mode.

  That is, in this pachinko machine 10, as the opening / closing execution mode, a round number regulation mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit, and a round game is not set, and the number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 is An opening / closing number regulation mode that is terminated when one of the condition that the upper limit number of times is reached and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the big prize opening 32a is satisfied is set. Yes. The round number regulation mode shifts based on any jackpot result, and the open / close number regulation mode shifts based on a special loss result.

  Here, the round game is one of the conditions that a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a prize winning opening 32a. A game that continues until is satisfied. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds (15R) regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  After executing the processing in step S507, round setting processing is executed in step S508. The setting process for the round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, "9" is set in the winning counter PC of the RAM 94 as the upper limit number which is one end condition of the round game. This number is the same as the upper limit number of the opening / closing number regulation mode that is shifted when the result of the special deviation is obtained. In a succeeding step S602, it is determined whether or not this time is a process for specifying the number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 in the first round of the round number regulation mode. Since this is a setting process for rounds started at the start of the round number regulation mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S602, and the process proceeds to step S603.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the current round number regulation mode is the explicit high probability winning result C. If the result is the explicit high probability winning result C, in step S604, “19” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated. If it is not the explicit high probability winning result C, it is determined in step S605 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition is the explicit high probability winning result B. If the result is the explicit high probability winning result B, in step S606, “15” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated. If it is not the explicit high probability winning result B, it is determined in step S607 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition is the low likelihood winning result B or the non-explicit high probability winning result B. If it is any jackpot result, in step S608, “8” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated. If it is not any of the jackpot results, in step S609, “1” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated.

  In other words, the number of open / close operations of the variable winning device 32 set in the 1R is different, although it is not one-to-one depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Note that the processing after step S610 will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15), after executing the process of step S506 or step S508, the standby time for opening the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S509. “2000” is set as (standby period). The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 4 sec. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In addition, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for the opening is set in step S509 regardless of the type of game result that is the trigger. Therefore, the waiting time for opening in the opening / closing execution mode is the same regardless of the type of game result that has been triggered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for the opening is slightly different, it may be configured to be recognized as the same by the player, such as the most advantageous jackpot result. When some game results become an opportunity, it is good also as a structure greatly different from the case where another game result becomes an opportunity.

  After executing the processing in step S509, an opening command is set in step S510. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode. The opening command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Processing in the sound emission control device 72 by receiving the opening command will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S511, after executing the external output setting process at the time of mode transition, the gaming state transition process is terminated. The contents of the external output setting process at the time of mode transition will be described in detail later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S512. In step S512, a delay external output setting process is executed. The contents of the external output setting process for delay will be described in detail later. In subsequent step S513, a special winning opening / closing process is executed. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 32a is open. If the big prize opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S702 whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0”, and in step S703, whether the value of the timer counter T is “0”. Determine whether or not.

  Incidentally, when the open / close execution mode is being executed (step S501: YES), the special winning opening 32a is being closed (step S701: NO), and the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” (step S702: YES). ) Means that it is during the waiting time for ending. Further, the open / close execution mode is in progress (step S501: YES), the special winning opening 32a is closed (step S701: NO), and the value of the open / close counter SOC is not “0” (step S702: NO). Further, when the value of the timer counter T is not “0” (step S703: NO), it is during the waiting time for the opening or the waiting time from when the special winning opening 32a is closed until it is opened again. Means that.

  When the value of the opening / closing counter SOC is “0” or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the big prize opening opening / closing process is finished as it is. When the value of the open / close counter SOC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the big prize opening opening / closing process is executed after executing the big prize opening opening process in step S704. finish.

  The special winning opening opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S801, the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently being executed is one of the low-accuracy big hit result A, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result A, the explicit high-precision big hit result A, and the special outlier result. It is determined whether it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, “30” is set to the timer counter T in step S802. Since the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started as described above, the release time set in step S802 is It is 60 msec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, the situation in which the current big prize opening release process is activated in step S803 is that the game result triggered by the above is the low-probability big hit result B and the 1st- The game result that corresponds to the 2R eye or the above-mentioned opportunity is the non-explicit high-precision jackpot result B and the game result that corresponds to the 1R to 2R eyes or the above-mentioned trigger is the explicit high-precision jackpot result Whether it is B and corresponds to the 1st to 2R or the game result that is the above-mentioned opportunity is the explicit high probability hit result C and the 1R, and does not correspond to the final opening / closing timing , Is determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, "30" is set to the timer counter T in step S802. If a negative determination is made in step S803, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, the situation where the current winning prize opening process is activated corresponds to the situation in which the game result that is the above-mentioned trigger is the explicit high-accuracy big hit result C and the first opening and closing timing. Judge whether it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S804, "10000" is set to the timer counter T in step S805. If a negative determination is made in step S804, “14500” is set in the timer counter T in step S806. Since the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started as described above, the release time set in step S805 is 20 sec. And the opening time set in step S806 is 29 sec.

  After executing the process of step S802, step S805 or step S806, the release execution process is executed in step S807. In the opening execution process, the variable winning driving unit 32c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 32a is in an open state.

  In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, one opening mode of the variable winning device 32 is set in a plurality of types with different opening continuation times (opening continuation periods) from when the big winning opening 32a is opened until it is closed. Has been. Specifically, a long-time mode (long-term mode) set to 29 sec, which is the longest duration, and a medium-time mode (20 sec, which is an intermediate time shorter than the longest time), Medium period mode) and a short time mode (short period mode) set to 0.06 sec which is the shortest time shorter than the intermediate time.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the launch handle 55 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Be controlled. In addition, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to 9 for round games, and the upper limit number of end conditions is also set to 9 in the open / close number regulation mode. Then, in the long time mode and the middle time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game or the open / close number regulation mode is set. Will be. On the other hand, in the short time mode, a time shorter than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game or the open / closed number regulation mode, more specifically, a time shorter than the launch period of the game ball is released. The duration is set. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once in the long-time mode or the medium-time mode, the maximum number in the single round game or the open / closed number regulation mode with respect to the large winning opening 32a. When a winning is expected and the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode, there is one even if no winning occurs in the big winning opening 32a or a winning occurs. It is expected to be about.

  Also, depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition and the progress status of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening mode set for one opening of the variable winning device 32 is different, although it is not 1: 1. ing.

  After executing the process of step S807, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the current opening of the special winning opening 32a is related to a new start of the round game in the round number regulation mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S808, after setting a round start command in step S809, the main prize winning opening release process is terminated, and if a negative determination is made in step S808, the main prize winning is continued. The mouth opening process is terminated. The round start command set in step S809 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the sound emission control device 72 recognizes that a round game has been newly started. The

  Returning to the description of the special winning opening / closing process (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S701 that the special winning opening 32a is open, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the opening continuation time has elapsed for the current opening of the big prize opening 32a by determining whether or not the timer counter T is “0”. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S706.

  In step S706, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize winning opening 32a. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. If a winning has occurred, the numerical information of the winning counter PC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S707. In a succeeding step S708, it is determined whether or not this time is the 1R round of the round number regulation mode and the opening state of the variable winning device 32 is a short time state. If this is the case, a premium command is set in step S709. Here, the set premium command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Processing in the sound emission control device 72 by receiving the premium command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S708 or after the processing in step S709 is executed, it is determined in step S710 whether or not the winning counter PC is “0”. If the winning counter PC is not “0”, the main winning opening / closing process is terminated. If the winning counter PC is “0”, a closing execution process is executed in step S711. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is finished so that the currently-open big winning opening 32a is closed.

  In a succeeding step S712, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special outage result. If the result is not a special loss result, a round end command is set in step S713. The round end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the sound emission control device 72 recognizes that the round game has ended.

  In subsequent step S714, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted, and then in step S715, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, a round setting process is executed in step S716. The round setting process will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the setting process for the round, as described above, first, in step S601, “9” is set in the winning counter PC, and in subsequent step S602, the variable winning device 32 in the first round of the round number regulation mode is set this time. It is determined whether or not the process is for specifying the number of times of opening and closing. Since this is a setting process for a round started in the middle of the round number regulation mode, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the process proceeds to step S610.

  In step S610, it is determined whether or not this time is a process for specifying the number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 in the second round of the round number regulation mode. If it falls under 2R, whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the current round number regulation mode is the low-probability winning result B or the unspecified high-probable winning result B in step S611. Determine whether. If it is one of these jackpot results, in step S612, “8” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated. If none of the above jackpot results, in step S613, “1” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S610 that the current time does not correspond to the 2R, this setting process ends after setting “1” to the open / close counter SOC in step S614.

  That is, the number of open / close operations of the variable winning device 32 set in the 2R is different, although it is not one-to-one depending on the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition. On the other hand, regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition, the number of open / close operations of the variable prize-winning device 32 set after the third round is common to one.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 17), after executing the setting process for round in step S716, after setting “750” to the timer counter T in step S717, The process ends. The numerical information set in this case is numerical information for the round start waiting time between successive round games, and 1.5 seconds is set in the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the numerical information for the round start waiting time is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the round number regulation mode and regardless of the progress of the round number regulation mode.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the game result that triggered the transition is a special outage result, or if it is determined in step S715 that the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S718. In step S718, “3000” is set in the timer counter T as the ending waiting time (waiting period). In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the waiting time for ending is 6 sec, which is longer than the waiting time for opening. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, regardless of the type of game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending is set in step S718. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is the same in any type of opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for ending is slightly different, it may be configured to be recognized as the same by the player, for example, the most advantageous jackpot result When some game results become an opportunity, it is good also as a structure greatly different from the case where another game result becomes an opportunity.

  After executing the process of step S718, after setting an ending command in step S719, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The ending command set in step S719 is transmitted to the sound light emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the sound light emission control device 72 recognizes that the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S705 that the timer counter T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S720. In step S720, a closing execution process is executed. The contents of the closing execution process are the same as in step S711.

  In subsequent step S721, the numerical information of the open / close counter SOC is updated so that 1 is subtracted, and in step S722, it is determined whether or not the open / close counter SOC is “0”. If the open / close counter SOC is not “0”, “750” is set in the timer counter T in step S717, and then the big prize opening opening / closing process is terminated.

  The numerical information set in step S717 in the above processing flow is numerical information for the waiting time until the variable winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state and then to the open state again. In the machine 10, 1.5 sec is set. In this case, the numerical information for the opening standby time is the same regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and regardless of the progress of the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, the numerical information for the opening waiting time is the same as the numerical information for the round start waiting time between successive round games. Thereby, it becomes possible to always make the opening waiting time constant when the variable winning device 32 is continuously opened and closed.

  If it is determined in step S722 that the open / close counter SOC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S723. In step S723, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is being executed this time is a special outage result.

  If the game result that is the trigger is not a special loss result, that is, if the game result that is the trigger is any jackpot result, a round end command is set in step S724. The processing when the round end command is set is the same as that in step S713.

  Thereafter, in step S725, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted. In a succeeding step S726, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S716. The processing after step S716 is as already described.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S723 or an affirmative determination is made in step S726, the process proceeds to step S718. The processing after step S718 is as already described.

  The game state transition process including the big prize opening / closing process proceeds as in steps S501 to S513, so that the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the game result triggered by the transition is executed. In this case, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by one of the low-accuracy big hit result A, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result A, the explicit high-precision big hit result A, and the special outlier result, the open / close pattern of the variable winning device 32 is substantially the same. (Hereinafter also referred to as pattern A opening / closing execution mode).

  Further, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by any of the low probability winning result B, the non-explicit high probability winning result B, and the explicit high probability winning result B, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is substantially the same (hereinafter referred to as a pattern). Also referred to as B open / close execution mode). In this case, as compared with the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B has a longer time for the opening / closing execution mode to continue, and the number of opening / closing operations of the variable winning device 32 is also increased.

  Further, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high probability winning result C, the variable winning device 32 is controlled with an opening / closing pattern different from both the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A and the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B (hereinafter, referred to as “open / close execution mode”). Also referred to as pattern C open / close execution mode). Further, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by either the low probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is substantially the same (hereinafter also referred to as pattern D opening / closing execution mode). In this case, the variable prize-winning device 32 is controlled in an opening / closing pattern different from any of the opening / closing execution modes of patterns A to C in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern D.

  Here, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B, and the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C, there is a section in which the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is common from the start timing to the midway timing. Then, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is ended as the common section is digested. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B and the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C, it continues even after the common section is digested. In this case, the continuation mode is different between the pattern B opening / closing execution mode and the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. This makes it possible for the player to predict which opening / closing execution mode is to be performed at the start of the opening / closing execution mode while diversifying the opening / closing execution modes. Details of this action and effect will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15), after the special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S513, the process proceeds to step S514. In step S514, it is determined whether both the round counter RC and the open / close counter SOC are “0”. If either one is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If both are “0”, it is determined in step S515 whether or not the timer counter T is “0”. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the timer counter T is “0”, the external output release processing in the support mode is executed in step S516. The contents of the external output cancellation process will be described later. Then, after executing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S517, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous big hit result or any explicit high probability big hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the flag is set if the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 94 in step S902, and the state is maintained if it is already set. . As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

  In the subsequent step S903, when the number limit flag is set in the RAM 94, the number limit flag is cleared. When the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94 and the number limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes one of the jackpot results. The

  In the subsequent step S904, when the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and when the flag is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Further, this high probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes any one of the jackpot results. Thereafter, in step S905, after executing the external output setting process in the support mode, the shift process is terminated. The external output setting process in this support mode will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is any of the non-explicit high-precision winning results. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S907 whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94.

  If the high-frequency support flag is set, the migration process is terminated after the processes of steps S903 to S905 already described are executed. If the high frequency support flag is not set, in step S908, if the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. To do. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Further, this high probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes any one of the jackpot results. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S909 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is any of the low probability winning results. . If a negative determination is made in step S909, the migration process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, the high probability mode flag is cleared in step S910 if the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 94. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. Further, this low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the most advantageous result or any highly accurate result.

  In a succeeding step S911, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the low probability winning result C. In the case of the low probability winning result C, in step S912, if the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set. If the flag is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, in step S913, “100” is set in the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. In the subsequent step S914, if the number limit flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the high frequency support mode is continued over 100 game times that is the end reference number, and when 100 game times are consumed, both the high frequency support flag and the frequency limit flag are cleared. Switch to the low frequency support mode. Incidentally, although the detailed description is omitted, this processing is executed in the power combination support processing in step S205 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). Then, after executing the external output setting process in the support mode in step S915, the transition process is terminated. The external output setting process in the support mode will be described later.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S911, that is, if the low likelihood winning result A or the low likelihood winning result B is, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94. To do. If a negative determination is made in step S916, the present transition process is terminated as is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S916, the process proceeds from step S913 to step S915, and then the present transition process is terminated. At the end of the transition process, the flag corresponding to the game result information set in the RAM 94 is cleared.

  As described above, when the game result of the game round becomes the most advantageous jackpot result or any of the explicit high probability jackpot results, the opening / closing execution mode (i.e., regardless of the state at the time of the game round) After completion of the round number regulation mode), the game state is shifted to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  In addition, when the game result of a game round becomes any of the non-explicit high probability winning results, if the state at the time of the game round is the high-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the (round number regulation mode), the game state is shifted to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes a jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  On the other hand, when the game time is in the low frequency support mode, the game that is in the high probability mode and in the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. Transition to the state. These high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  Further, when the game result of the game round becomes the low probability hit result C, the low after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) is ended regardless of the state at the time of the game round. The game state is switched to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result, and the high frequency support mode has digested 100 game times without the game result of the game times being the jackpot result. In case of low frequency support mode. Incidentally, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the low probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  In addition, when the game result of the game times is the low probability big hit result A or the low probability big hit result B, when the state at the time of the game round is the high frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode After the end of (that is, the round number regulation mode), the game state is shifted to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game time becomes the next jackpot result, and the high frequency support mode has digested 100 game times without the game result of the game time being the jackpot result. In case of low frequency support mode.

  On the other hand, when the game time is in the low frequency support mode, the game that is in the low probability mode and in the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. Transition to the state. The low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result.

  By the way, when the low probability hit result A or the low probability hit result B is obtained, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the low probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In addition, a gaming state that is not the opening / closing execution mode and is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode corresponds to the normal gaming state.

  In addition, when the game result of the game times includes any special result, including the special result, the transition between the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

<About the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 72>
Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 102 in the sound emission control device 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the effect determination process is periodically activated by the MPU 102 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command are received. If these commands are received, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the mode lottery condition is satisfied.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of effect modes are set so that the effect contents selected in the effect for game times are different. Specifically, an effect mode with a low expectation level, an effect mode with a medium expectation level, an effect mode with a high expectation level, and an effect mode with a high probability are set. The low expectation mode, the medium expectation mode, and the high expectation mode may be selected regardless of whether the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode. Mode. However, the selection rates are different from each other, and in the case of the low probability mode, the selection rate is set such that the production mode with the low expectation level> the production mode with the medium expectation level> the production mode with the high expectation level. In addition, in the case of the high probability mode, the selection rate is set such that the production mode with the low expectation level <the production mode with the medium expectation level <the production mode with the high expectation level. The high-definition production mode is not selected when the low-probability mode is selected, but is selected when the high-probability mode is selected.

  In each effect mode, the types of symbols variably displayed on each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the effect for game times are the same, but the background image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 and the expected effect are displayed. The type of character displayed on the display screen G at the time of execution and the content of the effect selected in the super reach display with high expectation for the jackpot result among the reach displays are set to be different. Moreover, since the sound effect according to the content of the display effect in the display screen G is output from the speaker part 59, it can be said that the sound output mode is different between the effect modes. However, the mode of difference between the production modes is not limited to the above, and at least one of the background image, the character type, the content of the production to be selected, and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 59 is provided. You may make it differ, You may make it make production contents other than that differ.

  In addition, the mode lottery condition is established when a lottery for generating a transition to the effect mode is won in a situation where an effect mode other than the highly reliable effect mode is set. The transition occurrence lottery is a transition occurrence winning when a loop counter periodically updated in the RAM 104 is used and the counter value acquired at the timing of step S1002 corresponds to the transition occurrence winning.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the mode lottery condition is satisfied, an effect mode lottery process is executed in step S1003. In the effect mode lottery process, a loop counter that is periodically updated in the RAM 104 is used, and the numerical information of the loop counter corresponds to the numerical range corresponding to the low expectation effect mode and the medium expectation effect mode. An effect lottery table assigned to either the numerical value range or the numerical value range corresponding to the high expectation effect mode is used. In this case, the effect lottery table is set in correspondence with each of the case where the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the case where the lottery mode is the high probability mode. The selection rates of the medium-expectation effect mode and the high-expectation effect mode are set to satisfy the above relationship. However, each effect lottery table does not include a highly accurate effect mode, and the highly accurate effect mode is not subject to lottery in the effect mode lottery process.

  In addition, although detailed description by illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the information which shows which mode is a lottery mode is transmitted from the main control apparatus 71 to the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 72 as a command. Then, it is possible to grasp the current lottery mode.

  In step S1003, an effect lottery table corresponding to the current winning / failing lottery mode is read from the ROM 103, and numerical information for lottery is read from the loop counter of the RAM 104, and the two are collated. In step S1004, the effect mode corresponding to the collation result in step S1003 is set as the transition destination effect mode. The RAM 104 is provided with an effect mode counter in which the counter value corresponds to each effect mode on a one-to-one basis, and the MPU 102 sets the effect mode by updating the counter value of the effect mode counter. At the same time, the present production mode is grasped from the counter value of the production mode counter.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1002 or after execution of step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, based on the content of the type command received in step S1001, it is determined whether the game result of the game time started this time is the most advantageous big hit result or the low probability big hit result C.

  If it is the most advantageous jackpot result or low-probable jackpot result C, in step S1006, symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of jackpot result is executed. In the symbol determination process, when the result is the most advantageous jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same odd number of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. To do. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the case of the low probability winning result C, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of even symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of even symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  If it is determined in step S1005 that neither the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result C is found, the game result of the game start started this time is the most advantageous based on the contents of the type command in step S1007. It is determined whether the result is a jackpot result other than the jackpot result and the low probability jackpot result C or a special outlier result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, a common symbol determination process is executed in step S1008. In the symbol determination process, a common symbol combination (specifically, predetermined on one effective line L1 to L5 is set while preventing the same symbol combination from being established on any effective line L1 to L5. Determines the information corresponding to the stop result in which “3 · 4 · 1”) is established as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like, but may be configured in advance as a specific effective line.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1007, a normal determination symbol determination process is executed in step S1009. In the symbol determination process, based on the content of the change command, it is determined whether or not it is a game time related to occurrence of outlier reach display. Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of detachment symbols is established on the lines L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result is determined in which the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the common symbol combination is not stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the game times are not related to the occurrence of outreach display, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the detach reach symbols is not stopped and displayed is determined as the information of the current stop result.

  In addition, in the symbol determination process for normal removal, a configuration in which a stop result in which the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed may be selected.

  After executing any one of steps S1006, S1008, and S1009, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, a process for determining an effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, by referring to the production table stored in advance in the ROM 103, the production duration time (production duration period) corresponding to the variation command and type command received this time is selected, and Select content. In this case, an effect table is provided corresponding to each effect mode, and in step S1010, an effect duration time is selected with reference to the effect table corresponding to the current effect mode. Select the contents of. In addition, a lottery of whether or not to display a notice is also performed. The MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current game time according to the effect pattern determined in step S1007.

  In subsequent step S1011, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1006, step S1008, or step S1009 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1010 are transmitted to display control apparatus 111. The processing contents of the display control device 111 upon receiving these commands will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001 or after the processing in step S1011 is executed, it is determined in step S1012 whether an opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1013.

  The effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1101, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is a low-probability winning result A, an unspecified high-probable winning result A, and a special outlier result. It is determined whether it is either. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, effect mode lottery processing is executed. The contents of the effect mode lottery process are the same as in step S1003. However, the selection of whether to use the low probability mode or the high probability mode as the effect lottery table is performed according to the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, when the information included in the opening command is the low probability winning result A, the production lottery table for the low probability mode is selected, and when the information is the unspecified high probability winning result A, Select an effect lottery table for the high probability mode. Also, if the result is a special failure result, if the current success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the production lottery table for the low probability mode is selected, and if the current success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability mode is selected. Select a production lottery table.

  After executing the process of step S1102, in step S1103, the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of step S1102 is set as the transition destination effect mode. In a succeeding step S1104, the effect A1 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current opening / closing execution mode according to the production pattern corresponding to the production A1.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode that is executed in response to any one of the low likelihood winning result A, the non-explicit high probability winning result A, and the special outlier result is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A as described above, and its start The opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the end to the end is almost common. The effect A1 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing pattern proceeds. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the production pattern corresponding to production A1 is subdivided so that the mode of light emission control and the mode of audio | voice output control may become a thing according to the lottery result of step S1102.

  In a succeeding step S1105, an effect A1-related command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A1-related command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect A1 should be performed, and information corresponding to the lottery result in step S1102. The processing contents of the display control device 111 upon receiving the command will be described later. After performing the process of step S1105, the effect determination process for the full opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, in step S1106, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is the low likelihood winning result B. Then, it is determined whether the non-explicit high probability hit result B or the explicit high probability hit result B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, effect mode lottery processing is executed. The contents of the effect mode lottery process are the same as in step S1003. However, the selection of whether to use the low probability mode or the high probability mode as the effect lottery table is performed according to the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, when the information included in the opening command is the low probability winning result B, the production lottery table for the low probability mode is selected, and the non-explicit high probability winning result B or the explicit high likelihood winning result is selected. In the case of B, an effect lottery table for the high probability mode is selected.

  After performing the process of step S1107, in step S1108, the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of step S1107 is set as the effect mode of the transfer destination. In a succeeding step S1109, the effect A2 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current opening / closing execution mode according to the production pattern corresponding to the production A2.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode executed with one of the low-accuracy big hit result B, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result B, and the explicit high-probability big hit result B is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B as already described. The opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end is generally the same. The effect A2 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing pattern proceeds. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the production | generation pattern corresponding to production A2 is subdivided so that the aspect of light emission control and the aspect of audio | voice output control may become a thing according to the lottery result of step S1107.

  In a succeeding step S1110, an effect A2 command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A2-related command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect A2 should be performed, and information corresponding to the lottery result in step S1107. The processing contents of the display control device 111 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  In subsequent step S1111, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, it is determined whether or not the game result that has triggered the transmission of the command is the explicit high probability winning result B. If it is not the explicit high-accuracy big hit result B, the effect determination processing for the actual opening / closing execution mode is terminated as it is, and if it is the explicit high-precision big hit result B, the effect mode correction processing is executed in step S1112. After that, the effect determination process for the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  In the effect mode correction process, a process of correcting the effect mode setting from the effect mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process in step S1107 to the highly reliable effect mode is executed. Thereby, when the effect for game times is started after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the effect for the game times is not the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result in step S1107, but the effect mode with high certainty. Done in In other words, when the explicit high probability winning result B is reached, the effects in the opening / closing execution mode are the case of the low probability winning result B and the non-explicit high probability winning result B in which the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is common. The same effect A2 is selected, but after the opening / closing execution mode, unlike the case of the low-accuracy large hit result B and the case of the unspecified high-probability hit result B, the high-definition effect is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1106, based on the information included in the opening command received this time in step S1113, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is an explicit high probability winning result. A is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1113, the process proceeds to step S1114.

  In step S1114, effect mode setting processing is executed. In the effect mode setting process, a highly reliable effect mode is set as a transition destination effect mode. In a succeeding step S1115, the effect A3 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current opening / closing execution mode according to the production pattern corresponding to the production A3.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode executed with the explicit high probability winning result A as an opportunity is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A as described above, and the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end is low. This is common to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by any one of the probable hit result A, the non-explicit high probable hit result A and the special outlier result. The effect A3 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing pattern proceeds, but the content of the effect is different from the effect A1.

  In a subsequent step S1116, an effect A3 command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A3 command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect A3 should be performed. Since the transition destination of the production mode when the production A3 is selected is fixed in the highly reliable production mode as described above, the production A3 command includes dedicated information for individually identifying the production mode. Is not included. After executing the process of step S1116, the effect determination process for the full opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1113, based on the information included in the opening command received this time in step S1117, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is an explicit high-probability winning result. It is determined whether it is C. If a positive determination is made in step S1117, the process proceeds to step S1118.

  In step S1118, effect mode setting processing is executed. In the effect mode setting process, a highly reliable effect mode is set as a transition destination effect mode. In a succeeding step S1119, the effect A4 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current opening / closing execution mode according to the production pattern corresponding to the production A4. Here, the opening / closing execution mode executed with the explicit high probability winning result C as a trigger is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C as described above. The effect A3 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing pattern proceeds.

  In a succeeding step S1120, an effect A4 command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A4 command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect A4 should be performed. After executing the process of step S1120, the effect determination process for the full opening / closing execution mode ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1117, it means that the game result that triggered the transmission of the opening command is either the low probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result, and the process proceeds to step S1121. .

  In step S1121, effect mode setting processing is executed. In the setting process of the production mode, when the game result that is the trigger is the low probability hit result C, the production mode with the low expectation level is set as the transition destination production mode, and the game result that is the trigger is displayed. When the result is the most advantageous big hit result, the production mode with a high probability is set as the production mode of the transition destination. In subsequent step S1122, the effect B table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 in the current opening / closing execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 59 according to the effect pattern corresponding to the effect B. Here, the opening / closing execution mode executed with one of the low-probability big hit result C and the most advantageous big hit result as an opportunity is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D as already described. The effect B is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when proceeding with the opening / closing pattern.

  In a succeeding step S1123, an effect B command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect B command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect B should be performed. After executing the process of step S1123, the effect determination process for the full opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the effect determination process (FIG. 20), when a negative determination is made in step S1012, or after the process of step S1013 is executed, it is determined in step S1014 whether a premium command is received. As described above, the premium command is transmitted when a winning to the big prize opening 32a occurs in the first round of the round number regulation mode and the open state of the variable winning device 32 is a short time mode. .

  If a premium command has been received, a premium effect determination process is executed in step S1015. The MPU 102 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and output control of the speaker unit 59 so that a premium effect is performed in the middle of the current round number regulation mode.

  In a succeeding step S1016, a premium effect command is transmitted to the display control device 111. The MPU 113 of the display control device 111 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that a premium effect is performed during the current round number regulation mode. For example, a special character that does not appear in the effect for the normal opening / closing execution mode is displayed, or a special moving image is displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1014 or after the processing in step S1016 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1017. In the other processing, for example, processing for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on reception of a round start command, a round end command, and an ending command. However, the process for advancing the presentation based on the reception of the round start command and the round end command is not executed in a round game in which the big prize opening 32a is opened and closed in a short time mode, and a big prize in a long time mode. It is executed in a round game in which the mouth 32a is opened and closed. Thereafter, the effect determination process ends.

<V interrupt processing executed by display control device 111>
Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 113 in the display control apparatus 111 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is periodically started by the MPU 113 (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec).

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether a new command has been received. If a new command has been received, data table selection processing is executed in step S1202. The data table is an information group in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing is displayed when a moving image corresponding to a received command is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. It is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, or after executing the process of step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, pointer update processing is executed. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, it is possible for the MPU 113 to grasp processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  In subsequent step S1204, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing, the type of image data necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 116 and the parameters applied to the grasped image data are determined. Perform the operation.

  Thereafter, after executing the drawing list output process in step S1205, the V interrupt process is terminated. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 116. In this case, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately preceding task process becomes a drawing target in the video RAM 118, and the parameter information updated in the task process is set together. In the VDP 116, necessary image data is read from the character ROM 117 according to the drawing list, and set in the frame buffer of the video RAM 118 in a state where the parameters are applied to the read image data. Thereby, drawing data for one frame is created. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the created drawing data, whereby an image for one frame is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  Here, the commands received by the MPU 113 of the display control device 111 from the sound emission control device 72 include a stop result command and a pattern command. When these commands are received, in step S1202, a data table necessary for executing the game turning effects corresponding to the respective commands on the symbol display device 41 is selected. In this case, a video of a game-playing effect is displayed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72, but the display content corresponds to the current effect mode. In addition, in the game turn effect moving image, the stop result determined by the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 is finally stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the common symbol determination process is executed in the MPU 102, the timing at which the common symbol combination is displayed is limited to the timing at which the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is ended in the game rotation effect. For example, a common symbol combination may be displayed in the middle of the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or a common symbol combination may be displayed during reach display. May be displayed, a common symbol combination may be displayed after a display indicating that the reach display has been removed, and a combination of symbols that is normally out of display is stopped. After that, a common symbol combination may be displayed.

  The received command includes an open / close execution mode command. When the command is received, in step S1202, a data table necessary for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the command on the symbol display device 41 is selected. Specifically, the command for the opening / closing execution mode includes an effect A1 command, an effect A2 command, an effect A3 command, an effect A4 command, and an effect B command, as already described. The data table corresponding to each command is selected. In addition, since the production A1 command and the production A2 command include information corresponding to the lottery result of the production mode lottery process (step S1102 or step S1107), the data table of the production A1 and the production A2 system A data table corresponding to each lottery result is selected as the data table.

  The data table of effect A1, the data table of effect A2, and the data table of effect A3 are demonstrated in detail using FIG. FIG. 23 (a) shows a data table for effect A1, FIG. 23 (b) shows a data table for effect A2, and FIG. 23 (c) shows a data table for effect A3.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c), each data table includes information on the number of frames, which is information indicating the number of frames from the start of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, Information on the use data group used in each frame is set in a one-to-one correspondence. In this case, as already described, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A from which the effect A1 or the effect A3 is selected and the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B from which the effect A2 is selected are the start timing. There is a section in which the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is common from to the middle timing. Further, in the common section, the opening mode of the big winning opening 32a is a short-time mode in which the winning of the game balls does not substantially occur or the winning of the upper limit number of game balls does not substantially occur. The time required for this does not vary depending on the winning status of the big winning opening 32a. In correspondence with the existence of the common section, in each data table of FIGS. 23A to 23C, the production is shared.

  That is, the same use data group is set for the number of frames F (1) to F (q-x-1), and as shown in FIG. An effect is made to predict which of the effect mode and the high expectation effect mode is to be shifted to. Further, the same use data group is set for the subsequent frame numbers F (q−x) to F (q−y−1), and as shown in FIG. An effect as if the transition destination has been determined is performed. In this case, in the production A1 and the production A2, the production mode corresponding to the lottery result of the production mode lottery process (step S1102 or step S1107) is displayed as the transition destination. In the production A3, the production mode with a high expectation level is displayed as the transition destination. The number of frames F (1) to F (q−y−1) corresponds to the common effect, and the timing at which the common effect ends is the end timing of the common section.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the common effect ends may be before or after the end timing of the common section. However, in linking the common section according to the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 and the common performance according to the display mode of the symbol display device 41, the period in which both are performed should be overlapped to the extent that the player can recognize that they are the same. Is preferred.

  On the other hand, after the frame number F (q−y), an image corresponding to each effect is displayed. That is, in the production A1, the production in the state in which the transition destination is determined up to the final frame F (q) is performed.

  In the production A2, in the number of frames F (q−y) to F (q), as shown in FIG. 23 (C), there is an production showing that further production is developed in the opening / closing execution mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 23D, an effect indicating that the pattern B is in the opening / closing execution mode is performed. Thereafter, a predetermined effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is performed until the final frame F (r).

  Further, in the production A3, in the number of frames F (q−y) to F (q), as shown in FIG. 23 (C), there is an production showing that further production is developed in the opening / closing execution mode. As shown in FIG. 23 (E), the game result that triggered the transition to the current open / close execution mode indicates that the game result is an explicit high probability hit result A, or whether the game result is after the open / close execution mode. An effect indicating that the lottery mode is the high probability mode is performed.

  Incidentally, the data table of the effect A4 is set so that the same effect as in the case of the effect A2 is performed from the number of frames F (1) to F (q), but the effect after that is the effect A2. It is set so that an effect different from the case of is performed. In addition, in the data table of effect B, the common effect is not set, and an effect different from any of effect A1 to effect A4 is performed.

<About game results>
Next, the contents of various game results defined by executing the above various processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the game results set in the pachinko machine 10 other than the normal losing result include a low likelihood winning result A, a low likelihood winning result B, a low likelihood winning result C, and an unspecified highly likely winning result A. , Non-explicit high probability jackpot result B, explicit high probability jackpot result A, explicit high probability jackpot result B, explicit high probability jackpot result C, most advantageous jackpot result and special outlier result.

  Among these game results, the various jackpot results are game results that are selected when the winning lottery is won, and the special loss results are game results that are selected when the winning lottery is not won. In addition, the various jackpot results are game results that become a transition opportunity for either the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode, unlike the special loss results, but the transition modes are different as shown in FIG. .

  Each game result listed in FIG. 24 triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, but the contents of the opening / closing execution mode of the transition destination are different in a predetermined combination and individually. The contents of each open / close execution mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 25 in addition to FIG. FIG. 25 is a timing chart for explaining the contents of each open / close execution mode. FIG. 25 shows a case where the upper limit number of game balls are not won in the big prize opening 32a in each round game in the round number regulation mode.

  First, the case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the pattern D opening / closing execution mode that is shifted by either the low-probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the maximum number of times being 15 times. In each round game, the single prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed once for a long time. As a result, the player can receive a large amount of game balls.

  Next, the case where the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (a), in the low probability winning result A, the non-explicit high probability winning result A and the explicit high probability winning result A, the round number regulation mode in which round games are performed with the maximum number of times being 15 times. In each round game, the single prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed once in a short time mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 24, in the special loss result, the mode shifts to the open / closed number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and the large winning opening 32 a is opened and closed 15 times in a short time mode.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, the special prize opening 32a is opened and closed only in a short time mode, the number of times is 15 times, and the total number of times of opening and closing the special prize opening 32a is 15. As described above, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed only in a short time mode, so that even when the pattern A is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the game balls are not substantially paid out to the player. Therefore, the opening / closing execution mode can be executed as a kind of effect that does not substantially increase the player's ball.

  In the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, not only the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 32a but also the opening waiting time, the time between successive opening / closing operations, and the ending waiting time are the same. Therefore, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, the operation of the variable winning device 32 is visually the same regardless of the game result that triggered the shift, and any game from the operation of the variable winning device 32 The player cannot grasp whether the result is an opportunity.

  Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with a dedicated display unit indicating that it is in the round number regulation mode, and the upper limit number of rounds in the round number regulation mode is the same. There is no dedicated display section indicating the number of times the operation is performed. Therefore, it is impossible to grasp which of the round number regulation mode and the open / close number regulation mode based on the dedicated display section.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (A), the symbol display device 41 has a game chance that is one of the low-accuracy big hit result A, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result A, the explicit high-precision big hit result A, and the special outlier result. The combination of common symbols is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (B) to 25 (C), the effects in the opening / closing execution mode from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode to at least halfway timing. Is also common. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is executed, which game result is triggered even if an effect including the display content of the symbol display device 41 is confirmed at least until the middle of the timing? I can't figure out. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is executed, the player can play a game while predicting which game result is triggered. In FIG. 25, an effect as shown in FIG. 25B is performed until the timing of t1, and an effect as shown in FIG. 25C is performed from the timing of t1.

  When the low probability jackpot result A, the unspecified high probability jackpot result A, and the special outlier result trigger the transition, the previous support mode is continued. Furthermore, when these game results trigger the transition, the effects in the opening / closing execution mode are common from the start timing to the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, when the low-accuracy big hit result A, the non-explicit high-probability big hit result A, and the special outlier result trigger the transition, the player is set to either the low probability mode or the high probability mode. It is possible to play a game while predicting whether or not, and the degree of attention of the game after the opening / closing execution mode can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the result is an explicit high probability winning result A, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode used so far. Therefore, for example, in the case of the low-frequency support mode, when the result is an explicit high-probability hit result A and the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, the player moves to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the player Can recognize that the game result that is the trigger of the transition is an explicit high-accuracy big hit result A.

  Corresponding to such circumstances, when the result is an explicit high-accuracy big hit result A, from the timing t2 when the last opening / closing in the opening / closing execution mode is completed until the ending standby time elapses, FIG. (D) and a finalized effect as shown in FIG. 25 (E) are performed. As a result, when the explicit high probability winning result A is reached, the player predicts which game result is triggered until the middle of the opening / closing execution mode, while the explicit high probability winning result A is obtained from the middle. It is possible to teach that. In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is performed, the player will play the game with the expectation that the finalized effect will be performed, thereby improving the degree of attention of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. it can. Furthermore, since the timing at which the finalized effect is started is the timing at which the final opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 ends, it is difficult to determine which game result is triggered by the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. It is possible to achieve the effect by performing the above-mentioned definite effect without losing the effect of performing.

  Next, the case where the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (b), in the low probability winning result B, the non-explicit high probability winning result B, and the explicit high likelihood winning result B, the round number regulation mode in which round games are performed with the upper limit being 15 times. The total winning opening 32a is opened and closed 16 times in a short time manner in total in the 1R and 2R round games that have continued from the start timing. In other words, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game. In other words, in one round game, there occurs at least once a phenomenon that the special winning opening 32a is changed from the open state to the closed state and subsequently opened again. By the way, when the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is performed a plurality of times in one round game as described above, the upper limit duration that becomes one end condition of the round game is the opening duration in each short time mode, The time is the same as or slightly longer than the sum of the waiting times between a plurality of consecutive open / close operations. In each round game of the 3R to 15R, the single prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed once in a long time mode.

  That is, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the big prize opening 32a is first opened and closed 16 times in a short time mode, and then the big prize opening 32a is opened and closed 13 times in a long time mode. The total number of times the winning opening 32a is opened and closed is 29 times. Thereby, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the payout of the game ball to the player is not substantially generated from the start timing to the midway timing, but after the midway timing, a large amount of game balls to the player Payout occurs. However, the payout amount of game balls expected to be acquired in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is smaller than that in the pattern D opening / closing execution mode.

  The opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is not only the opening / closing mode of the grand prize opening 32a, but also the waiting time for opening, the time between successive opening / closing operations, and the waiting time for ending are the same among the game results that trigger the transition It has become. Therefore, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B, the operation of the variable winning device 32 is visually similar regardless of the game result that triggered the transition, and any game from the operation of the variable winning device 32 The player cannot grasp whether the result is an opportunity.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (A), the symbol display device 41 has a common symbol in the game times in which one of the low probability jackpot result B, the non-explicit high probability jackpot result B, and the explicit high probability jackpot result B. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the effects in the opening / closing execution mode are common from the start timing to the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed, even if the effect including the display content of the symbol display device 41 is confirmed, it is understood in the opening / closing execution mode which game result is the trigger. Can not do it. Therefore, when the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is executed, the player can play a game while predicting which game result is triggered.

  As shown in FIG. 24, when one of the low probability jackpot result B and the non-explicit high probability jackpot result B is a trigger for the transition, the big winning opening 32a in the short-time mode in each of the 1R and 2R eyes. Is opened 8 times each, but when the explicit high-precision jackpot result B triggers the transition, the big prize opening 32a is opened 15 times in the 1R and the big prize is won in the 2R. The mouth 32a is opened once. That is, the number of times of opening and closing in the short time mode that is continuous from the start timing is the same, but the number of times of opening and closing in the short time mode assigned to the round game of the 1R is the one in the case of the explicit high probability hit result B Is increasing.

  As already described, the premium effect is executed when the winning of the big winning opening 32a occurs in the first round of the round number regulation mode in the situation where the opening state of the big winning opening 32a is a short time aspect. In this configuration, as described above, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-probability winning result B is different from the low-probable winning result B and the non-probable result B by changing the opening / closing frequency of the big winning opening 32a in the 1R round game as described above. It is possible to increase the probability that the premium effect is executed as compared with the opening / closing execution mode that uses any one of the explicit high probability winning results B as a trigger. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B occurs, it is unclear which jackpot result is the trigger from the aspect of the effect for opening / closing execution mode excluding the premium effect and the aspect of the big prize opening 32a. When the premium performance is performed, it is possible to predict that the possibility of the explicit high probability hit result B is relatively high. Furthermore, in the short-time mode from the start timing to the eighth time, no prize is awarded to the big prize opening 32a, and the premium is based on the fact that the prize winning to the big prize-winning port 32a is generated in the short-time mode after the ninth time. A player who confirms that the performance has been performed can recognize that the currently executed opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the execution of the explicit high-accuracy big hit result B.

  When one of the low probability jackpot result B and the non-explicit high probability jackpot result B triggers the transition, the previous support mode is continued. Therefore, when either the low probability winning result B or the non-explicit high probability winning result B is triggered, the player determines whether the winning lottery mode is set to the low probability mode or the high probability mode. The game can be performed while predicting the game, and the degree of attention of the game after the opening / closing execution mode can be improved.

  Next, a case where the pattern C opening / closing execution mode is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (c), in the explicit high probability winning result C, a transition is made to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number, and in the round game of the 1R, the short-time mode After opening / closing the 18th prize winning opening 32a, the opening / closing of the one big winning prize opening 32a is performed in the middle time mode. That is, not only the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is performed a plurality of times in one round game, but also the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is performed in different types of opening modes during one round game. By the way, when the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is performed a plurality of times in one round game as described above, the upper limit duration that becomes one end condition of the round game is the opening duration in each short time mode, It is the same as or slightly longer than the sum of the opening duration in the medium time mode and the waiting time between a plurality of consecutive opening and closing operations. Further, in each round game of 2R to 15R, the single prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed once in a long time mode.

  That is, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, first, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short time mode is performed 18 times, and subsequently, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the medium time mode is performed once, Thereafter, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in a long-time manner is performed 14 times, so the total number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening 32a is 33 times. Thereby, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the payout of the game ball to the player does not substantially occur from the start timing to the midway timing, but after the midway timing, a large amount of game balls to the player Payout occurs. In this case, the amount of game balls that are expected to be acquired is equivalent to that in the pattern D opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, comparison of the opening / closing execution modes of the patterns A to C will be described.

  In both cases where the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed and the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is executed, the high probability mode may be set as the success / failure lottery mode, and the low probability mode is set. Sometimes. However, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the pattern is more than the probability that the non-explicit high probability winning result A and the explicit high probability winning result A are selected among various game results that trigger the pattern A opening / closing execution mode. The probability that either the non-explicit high probability hit result B or the explicit high probability hit result B is selected among various game results that trigger the opening / closing execution mode of B is set high. Therefore, when the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is executed, it is possible to play a game while expecting that the success / failure lottery mode becomes a high probability mode than when the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), in the case of the pattern A, in the case of the pattern B and the case of the pattern C, the big winning opening 32a in the short time mode from the start timing is displayed. Opening and closing is continuously performed 15 times. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), a common symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the game times corresponding to the patterns A to C, as well as FIG. 25 (B). As shown in FIG. 25 (C), the effects in the opening / closing execution mode are also common until the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode is performed 15 times from the start timing. Thereby, when opening / closing of the big winning opening 32a in the short time mode is started, the player predicts which of the opening / closing execution modes is the pattern A to the pattern C from the start timing to the middle timing. You can play games.

  Further, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short time mode is continuously performed 15 times from the start timing, and after the common section is finished, the big winning port 32a in the short time mode is further opened. Opening and closing is performed once. Further, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, after the common winning section 32a is opened / closed 15 times in a short time from the start timing and the common section is completed, the large winning opening 32a in the short time mode is further opened. Opening and closing is performed three times. Thereby, the player can grasp which of the opening / closing execution modes of the patterns A to C is counted by counting the number of times of opening / closing the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode from the start timing. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the pattern B and pattern C opening / closing execution modes, as shown in FIG. 25D and FIG. 25F, from the timing t2 when the last opening / closing related to the common section with the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is completed. Pattern B and pattern C are confirmed. As a result, when one of the opening / closing execution modes of the pattern B and the pattern C is entered, the player is predicted which opening / closing execution mode until the common section elapses from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode. From the middle, it is possible to teach that the pattern B or pattern C is in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in the common section, the player plays the game while expecting the finalized effect, and the degree of attention of the game during the opening / closing execution mode can be improved. Furthermore, since the timing at which the finalized effect is started is the timing at which the last opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 ends, it is difficult to determine which opening / closing execution mode is based on the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. Without losing the effect of the above, it is possible to achieve the effect by performing the above-mentioned definite effect.

  By the way, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times during one round game, so that in the configuration where the upper limit number of round games is the same, it continues from the start timing. While the opening mode of the big winning opening 32a is the same as that of the pattern A and the case of the pattern B, the pattern winning opening 32a can be opened and closed in the pattern B after the common opening mode.

  Also, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C, the special winning opening 32a is opened / closed a plurality of times during one round game, and after opening / closing in a short time mode is completed, switching to opening / closing in a medium time mode is performed. As a result, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of round games is the same, the opening mode of the big winning opening 32a that is continuous from the start timing is the same as the pattern A to pattern B, and after the common opening mode It is possible to win a maximum number of game balls in the same round game.

<External output from pachinko machine 10 to hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for external output from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of an electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed.

  As shown in FIG. 26, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. In the island facility S, a data counter DC is installed to correspond to each pachinko machine 10 on a one-to-one basis. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding pachinko machine 10, and includes a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of game times executed, and a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times of execution of a predetermined opening / closing execution mode. 2 display part DC2 is provided.

  A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as management control means for managing each pachinko machine 10 and each data counter DC. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and an MPU 201 is mounted therein. In the MPU 201, various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and ROM 202 storing fixed value data, and various data and information input from the pachinko machine 10 when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed are temporarily stored. And a RAM 203 which is a memory for storing the data.

  The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through an electrical wiring group EL1, and is also electrically connected to each data counter DC through an electrical wiring group EL2. And while performing the management process based on the information received from each pachinko machine 10, the signal according to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

  Here, a configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the pachinko machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 27A is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 showing the external terminal board 81 and its periphery in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 27B explains an external output buffer 94d provided in the RAM 94 of the main controller 71. FIG. 27C is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the external terminal plate 81.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the external terminal plate 81 is provided with a plurality of external terminals (output terminals) 81a to 81h. A total of eight external terminals 81a to 81h are provided, and the types of information output to the hall computer HC are different.

  The jackpot external terminal 81a is used to output information (winning information or winning signal) indicating that the main control device 71 is in the open / close execution mode based on the winning / losing lottery. The external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode is information (open / close execution information or open / close information indicating that the open / close execution mode is based on the fact that the main control device 71 has won a big hit or a special loss result) This is used to output an execution signal. The conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is in the open / close execution mode of any of patterns B to D, or the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is set to the high frequency support mode after the end. It is used to output information (conditional winning information or conditional winning signal) indicating that it is in the set opening / closing execution mode.

  The jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c are all used to output information indicating that they are in the open / close execution mode. The conditions for outputting are different.

  In particular, the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is in an opening / closing execution mode in which a player is actually throwing a ball, or a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is set as the above condition. Therefore, no information is output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c during the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special outage result, and the low probability support result A in the low frequency support mode. Alternatively, information is not output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c even during the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result of the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A. As a result, when the player can recognize that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is different from the one triggered by the special outage result, the information is output externally and the special outage result is used as an opportunity. When it is impossible to recognize that it is different from the one, it is possible to provide a terminal that does not externally output information to the game hall.

  In addition to the external terminals 81a to 81c, the external terminals 81a to 81h are connected to the support mode external terminal 81d used for outputting information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode. An external terminal 81e for the number of games used to output information indicating that the game round of the game has been completed, and an external terminal used for outputting information indicating that a winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred. 81f, an external terminal 81g used to output information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out, and information indicating that a predetermined fraud has been detected is used. And an external terminal 81h. The types of the external terminals 81a to 81h are not limited to those described above. For example, the external terminals used for outputting information indicating that the gaming machine main body 12 is open or the front door frame 14 are used. There may be provided an external terminal used for outputting information indicating that is open.

  A plurality of output setting unit areas 121 to 128 are provided in the external output buffer 94d of the RAM 94 of the main controller 71 in a one-to-one correspondence with the external terminals 81a to 81h. Each output setting unit area 121 to 128 has an information amount of a predetermined bit, specifically 1 bit, and each unit area 121 to 128 has “0” as no-output information and an output. Any information “1” as information is set. Note that the amount of information in each of the unit areas 121 to 128 is not limited to 1 bit and is arbitrary, and the data structure of the no-output information and the output-present information is also arbitrary.

  The main controller 71 is electrically connected to the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal board 81 in a one-to-one correspondence through the electric wiring group EL3 shown in FIG. A signal having a predetermined voltage is output to the external terminals 81a to 81h corresponding to the unit areas 121 to 128 in which “1” is set.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, each of the external terminals 81a to 81h is capable of transmitting an electrical signal from the main control device 71 to the hall computer HC, while preventing the reverse flow. It is constituted by. A light emitting diode 132 that is the primary side of the photocoupler 131 is connected to the main controller 71 via a resistor 133, and a light receiving element (phototransistor) 134 that is a secondary side is connected to the hall computer HC. Therefore, when a signal is output from the main controller 71 to the external terminals 81a to 81h corresponding to the unit areas 121 to 128 in which “1” is set in the external output buffer 94d, the external signal from which the signal is output is output. The light emitting diodes 132 of the terminals 81a to 81h emit light, and the light is received by the light receiving element 134 of the external terminals 81a to 81h and converted into an electric signal, and the electric signal is output to the hall computer HC.

  Note that the form of the electrical signal output to the hall computer HC is arbitrary, and a signal of 0V is output in a situation in which no external output is made from the main controller 71, and a predetermined value greater than 0V is generated by the external output. It is also possible to output a signal having a voltage of 1 or a mode in which the output pattern of the signal has a reverse relationship. Further, in a situation where no external output is made from the main control device 71, a signal having a reference voltage larger than 0V is output, and a signal having a voltage larger or smaller than the reference voltage is outputted by making an external output. It is good.

<About processing related to external output executed by main controller 71>
Next, processing related to external output executed by the main controller 71 will be described. However, in the following description, among the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal plate 81, the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, and the support mode A configuration related to an external output through the external terminal 81d will be mainly described.

  The process for starting external output through the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is included in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15) already described. Specifically, an external output setting process at the time of mode transition in step S511 and an external output setting process for delay in step S512. These two external output setting processes have different execution timings. The external output setting process at the time of the mode transition in step S511 is executed when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the delay external output setting process in step S512 is the opening / closing process. It is repeatedly executed after the execution mode is started.

<External output setting process during mode transition>
First, the external output setting process at the time of mode transition will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is any jackpot result. If it is any jackpot result, in step S1302, “1” is set in the first unit area 121 corresponding to the jackpot external terminal 81a in the external output buffer 94d, and the open / close execution mode external mode is set. “1” is set in the second unit area 122 corresponding to the terminal 81b. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output toward the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b is started, and each terminal 81a, It is possible to output information associated with 81b to the hall computer HC.

  On the other hand, when it is not any jackpot result, that is, when the result of special loss is triggered, “1” is set only in the second unit area 122 in step S1303. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output toward the external terminal 81b for the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the output of information associated with the terminal 81b is stopped. This can be performed on the computer HC.

  After executing the process of step S1302 or step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the most advantageous big hit result or the low probability big hit result C. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, after setting “1” in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the external output buffer 94d in step S1305, this external output The setting process ends. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started, and the output of the information associated with the terminal 81c is stopped. This can be performed on the computer HC.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1304, in step S1306, the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a low-probability winning result B, an unspecified high-probability winning result B, or an explicit high-probable winning result A. Then, it is determined whether the result is either the explicit high probability hit result B or the explicit high probability hit result C. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, in step S1307, an output delay flag is set in the RAM 94, and “12950” is set in the delay timer counter DT provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. Thereafter, the external output setting process is terminated.

  The output delay flag is information for the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 to recognize that the start of external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is delayed. In addition, the delay timer counter DT is a counter for the MPU 92 to grasp at which timing the start of the external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is delayed. Since the numerical information set in the delay timer counter DT is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started, the delay time (delay period) set in step S1307. Is 25.9 sec. This time is the same as or substantially the same as the time required from the start timing to the end of the common section in the pattern A to pattern C open / close execution mode. The effect by this is demonstrated in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1306, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a special outage result. If the result is a special deviation result, the external output setting process is terminated as it is. If the result is not a special outlier result, that is, if the result is a low likelihood hit result A or an implicit high likelihood hit result A, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94. Then, it is determined whether or not a game result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode is obtained in a situation where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the high-frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, the external output setting process is terminated after executing the process of step S1307 already described. If a negative determination is made in step S1309, the external output setting process is performed as it is. Exit.

<External output setting process for delay>
Next, the delay external output setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether an output delay flag is set in the RAM 94 or not. If the output delay flag is not set, the external output setting process is terminated as it is. If the output delay flag is set, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the numerical information of the delay timer counter DT is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the delay time has elapsed. If the delay timer counter DT is not “0”, the external output setting process is terminated. If the delay timer counter DT is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, “1” is set in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the external output buffer 94d. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started, and the output of the information associated with the terminal 81c is stopped. This can be performed on the computer HC. Thereafter, in step S1404, the output delay flag set in the RAM 94 is cleared, and the external output setting process is terminated.

<External output release processing>
Next, the external output cancellation process executed in step S413 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the external output cancellation process, a process of setting information of the first unit area 121 to the third unit area 123 in the external output buffer 94d to “0” is executed. Thereby, when the signal output toward the external terminal 81a for jackpot is performed, or when the signal output toward the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode is performed, the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is output. When the signal output is directed, the signal output is stopped in the external output process (step S201) of the next normal process (FIG. 12).

  Here, the external output cancellation process is executed in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14) as described above, and the fluctuation start process is executed when a new game round is started. That is, a state in which signal output is directed to the external terminal 81a for jackpot, a state in which signal output is directed to the external terminal 81b for opening / closing execution mode, and an external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot The state in which the directed signal output is performed is not canceled when the corresponding opening / closing execution mode ends, but is released when the first game round is started after the opening / closing execution mode. By releasing as described above, it is possible to secure a long signal output period from each of the external terminals 81a to 81c. Moreover, since it is canceled when the first game round is started, the signal output period can be secured within a range that does not cause a problem in managing the pachinko machine 10.

  Note that the release timing is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be configured to be released when the opening / closing execution mode ends, and before or after a predetermined period with reference to the opening / closing execution mode end timing. It is good also as a structure canceled.

<Support mode external output setting processing>
Next, the external output setting process in the support mode executed in step S905 and step S915 of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode (FIG. 19) will be described.

  In the external output setting process in the support mode, a process of setting the information of the fourth unit area 124 in the external output buffer 94d to “1” is executed. Thereby, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output toward the support mode external terminal 81d is started, and the output of information associated with the terminal 81d is transferred to the hall computer. This can be done for HC. In this case, the timing at which the external output setting process for the support mode is executed is the timing at which the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The state where “1” is set in the fourth unit area 124 is canceled by the external output canceling process (step S516) in the support mode in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15). In the external output release processing, when the game result that triggered the transition to the current open / close execution mode is any jackpot result, the state where “1” is set in the fourth unit area 124 is released, If the result is an outlier, the cancellation is not performed. Thus, when the operation mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode based on any of the jackpot results, the signal output to the port mode external terminal 81d is stopped when the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, since the transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S517 is executed immediately after step S516, when the high-frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode, it is immediately directed to the external terminal 81d for the support mode. Signal output is started.

  In addition to the above case, the state where “4” is set in the fourth unit area 124 is when the high-frequency support mode is continued for 100 game times and then the low-frequency support mode is entered. Is also released.

  Incidentally, the external output setting process for the number of games is executed in step S310 of the game times control process (FIG. 13). In the external output setting process for the number of games, processing for setting the information of the fifth unit area 125 in the external output buffer 94d to “1” is executed. Thereby, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the external terminal 81e for the number of games is started, and the output of information associated with the terminal 81e is sent to the hall computer. This can be done for HC. In this case, the timing at which the external output setting process for the number of games is executed is the timing at which the game times end. Further, the state where “1” is set in the fifth unit area 125 is canceled by the external output canceling process in step S413.

<Regarding processing related to external output executed by hall computer HC>
Next, processing executed by the hall computer HC in response to an external output from the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  As already described, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through the electrical wiring group EL1. For details of the electrical connection, as shown in FIG. 26, the electrical wiring group EL1 has six electrical wirings individually. On the other hand, the external terminal plate 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with eight external terminals 81a to 81h as shown in FIG. That is, the signal path between one pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer HC is smaller than the number of external terminals 81 a to 81 h provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  In this case, the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c are partly provided for external output during the open / close execution mode. Although overlapping, the other external terminals 81d to 81h have no correlation with the contents of the external output and are independent. Therefore, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is introduced without renovating the conventional equipment, any one of the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is any one. It is considered that the electrical connection is made by selecting. In addition, even in a game hall that can provide the same number of signal paths as the number of external terminals 81a to 81h by refurbishing a conventional facility, the data counter DC displays the number of executions of a predetermined opening / closing execution mode. It is necessary to select a terminal that reflects information on the second display portion DC2 from the external terminal 81a for jackpot, the external terminal 81b for opening / closing execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot. However, the same management process is executed in the hall computer HC regardless of which terminal is selected.

  Hereinafter, the management process executed by the hall computer HC will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is periodically started at a relatively short cycle of 1 msec.

  First, in step S1501, the management target counter provided in the RAM 203 of the hall computer HC is updated. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is changed from the previous time. In subsequent step S1502, it is determined whether or not reception of the opening / closing execution mode system signal from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has been started. In this case, in the electrical wiring group EL1 of the hall computer HC, electrical wiring connected to any one of the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is determined in advance. In step S1502, it is determined whether reception of a signal is started through the electrical wiring.

  When the “signal reception” always rises from LOW to HI, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the signal has risen, and the “signal reception” always changes from HI to LOW. In the case of falling, it may be determined whether or not this signal has fallen.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, information on the date and time when reception of the open / close execution mode signal is started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is stored in the RAM 203 in step S1503. In a succeeding step S1504, a control start process of the second display unit is executed. Specifically, the second display unit DC2 is controlled to be added so that the number information of the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is incremented, and after the addition Is displayed in a blinking manner to notify the player or the game hall manager that the player is in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Note that the notification mode is arbitrary. For example, when the data counter DC is provided with a light emitting unit other than the first display unit DC1 and the second display unit DC2, the light emitting unit is set in a light emitting state or in a blinking state. It is good also as a structure. Further, for example, an audio output unit may be provided in addition to or in place of the data counter DC, and notification may be performed by audio output.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1502 or after execution of the process of step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not reception of the opening / closing execution mode system signal has been completed for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If “signal reception” always rises from LOW to HI, it is determined whether or not reception of the open / close execution mode system signal has been completed depending on whether a fall from HI to LOW has occurred. If the “signal reception” always falls from HI to LOW, whether or not the reception of the open / close execution mode system signal is completed depending on whether or not the rise from LOW to HI has occurred. Can be determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, in step S1506, the RAM 203 stores information on the date and time when reception of the open / close execution mode system signal for the currently managed pachinko machine 10 is completed. In a succeeding step S1507, a control end process of the second display unit is executed. Specifically, the display control of the second display unit DC2 is performed so that the number of times information continues to be displayed in a state where the blinking display of the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is finished. To do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1505 or after execution of the processing in step S1507, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, it is determined whether or not the reception of the support mode signal has started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. In this case, it is determined whether or not signal reception is started through the electrical wiring connected to the support mode external terminal 81d in the electrical wiring group EL1 of the hall computer HC.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S 1508, in step S 1509, the RAM 203 stores information on the date and time when reception of the support mode system signal for the currently managed pachinko machine 10 is started. In the following step S1510, it is determined whether or not it is immediately after the reception of the opening / closing execution mode system signal for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time.

  In step S1510, it may be configured to determine whether or not reception of the support mode system signal is started during reception of the opening / closing execution mode system signal. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether at least one of a condition that reception of a signal is started and reception of a support mode signal is started during reception of an open / close execution mode signal is satisfied.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1510, a support mode notification start process is executed in step S1511. In the notification start process of the support mode system, notification indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is started. For example, the number of times displayed on the first display unit DC1 may be displayed in a blinking manner, or a dedicated light emitting unit may be displayed in a blinking manner or displayed in a blinking manner. Further, as described above, the notification indicating that the high-frequency support mode is being performed is executed on condition that the support mode system signal is received while the switching execution mode system signal is being received. That is, the notification indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is made by receiving the support mode system signal in a state where the hall computer HC recognizes that it is in the open / close execution mode or after the open / close execution mode. Be started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1508, a negative determination is made in step S1510, or after the processing in step S1511 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1512, and other external outputs are output for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. The process corresponding to is executed. For example, when the reception of the support mode system signal is completed, the RAM 203 stores information on the date and time when the reception of the support mode system signal for the currently managed pachinko machine 10 is completed, and is in the high frequency support mode. The notification indicating this is terminated.

  For example, when reception of a signal from the external terminal 81e for the number of games is started, 1 is added to the number information of the first display unit DC1 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed. Thus, the display of the first display unit DC1 is controlled. In addition, when reception of a signal from the external terminal 81g corresponding to information output indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out is started, the predetermined number of pachinko machines 10 to be managed this time is stored in the RAM 203. The information indicating that the game ball is paid out is stored along with the date and time information. After executing the process of step S1512, the management process ends.

<External output execution timing>
Next, the execution timing of the external output will be described in correspondence with the difference in the opening / closing execution mode pattern.

  First, the case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D is executed based on the low-accuracy big hit result C or the most advantageous big hit result will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 31 (a) shows the output status of commands from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 72, FIG. 31 (b) shows the open / close status of the big prize opening 32a, and FIG. FIG. 31D shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a, FIG. 31D shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and FIG. FIG. 31 (f) shows an output state from the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, and FIG. 31 (f) is a notification indicating that the second display unit DC2 is in the open / close execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as an in-execution notification). ) Execution status. The hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c among the external terminals 81a to 81c. In the second display unit DC2, the external computer through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is externally connected. A case where the output status is reflected will be described.

  When the game end effect is being executed, the game end effect is ended in response to a change end command being transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing t1. Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t2, and an effect for the opening / closing execution mode is started when the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. Further, signal output from the main controller 71 is started for all of the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is started, in-execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2.

  Thereafter, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the 1R round game is started and a round start command is transmitted. Further, when the condition for ending the 1R round game is satisfied at the timing of t4, the special winning opening 32a is closed and a round end command is transmitted. In this case, the special winning opening 32a is opened in a long-time manner that allows the maximum number of round games to be won.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in a long-time manner is repeated, and at the timing t5, which is the timing when the round game of the 15R ends, counting of the waiting time for ending is started and the main controller 71 The ending effect is started when the ending command is transmitted from. Then, at the timing of t6, when the waiting time for ending elapses, a change command and a type command are transmitted from the main controller 71, and a new game round is started. Further, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is terminated, the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2 is terminated.

  As described above, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D in which the grand prize opening 32a is opened for a long time from the 1R round game, the external from the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is started from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode. By starting the output and continuing until the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode, the external output is continued during the period in which the special winning opening 32a is opened in a long-time manner. As a result, during the period in which a large amount of game balls are paid out through the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the external output is continued, and the hall computer indicates that the payment of the large amount of game balls is through the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. It can be recognized in HC. That is, by confirming the management data created in the RAM 203 of the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp whether a large amount of game balls are paid out illegally or in an open / close execution mode.

  In addition, the manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the execution notification is being performed on the second display unit DC2, and thus whether or not a large amount of game balls are paid out is illegal or depends on the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to easily grasp whether it is a thing.

  In the game hall, for each pachinko machine 10, the nail adjustment of the game area may be performed by grasping the number of prize balls per unit time. In this case, by making it possible to identify in the management data of the hall computer HC whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode in which a large amount of game balls are paid out, the situation where game balls are likely to be paid out and game balls are paid out. It becomes possible to grasp the number of prize balls per unit time for each of the situations that are unlikely to occur, and the nail adjustment can be performed satisfactorily.

  Furthermore, when the support mode of the electric accessory 34a shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the opening / closing execution mode, the electric accessory 34a is likely to be in an open state, and a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 34. Is likely to occur. In this case, as described above, external output is performed to the hall computer HC, and further notification is made during execution in the second display unit DC2, so that the winning to the lower working port 34 frequently occurs. It is possible to grasp whether the password is legitimate or fraudulent.

  Next, with respect to the case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed based on the low probability jackpot result A or the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, FIG. This will be described with reference to the timing chart of B). The contents of FIGS. 31A to 31F are as described above, and the hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, and the second display unit DC2 Similar to the case of FIG. 31A, the condition of the external output through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is reflected.

  When the game end effect is being executed, the game end effect is ended in response to a change end command being transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing t1. Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t2, and an effect for the opening / closing execution mode is started when the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, the signal output from the main control device 71 is started to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, but the signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not performed. . Further, since the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is not performed, notification during execution in the second display unit DC2 is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the special winning opening 32a in the 1R round game is opened and closed in a short time mode. In this case, transmission of a round start command and transmission of a round end command are performed at relatively short intervals.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode is repeated, and counting of the waiting time for ending is started at the timing t4, which is the timing when the round game of the 15R ends. Then, at the timing of t5, when the waiting time for ending elapses, a change command and a type command are transmitted from the main control device 71, and a new game time is started. In this case, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b is terminated.

  Here, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed based on the result of the special failure, the round start command and the round end command are not transmitted from the timing t3 to the timing t4. Although the signal output of the main controller 71 to the external terminal 81b for the opening / closing execution mode is performed but the signal output of the main controller 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a is not performed, other switching operations are performed. The mode in the execution mode is common to the case of FIG. Furthermore, when the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed, the effect A1 including the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is executed. As already described, when the low probability support mode A, the non-explicit high probability maximum result A, or the special outlier result in the low frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode. In the configuration, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is performed in such a situation by predicting which game result is triggered or which is set to the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode. The purpose is to increase. Under such circumstances, the signal output from the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not performed, so that the effect of setting the game to be predicted as described above disappears depending on the situation of the external output. You can avoid letting it go.

  Further, in the pattern A opening / closing execution mode, the opening of the big winning opening 32a is performed in a short time mode that does not substantially generate a winning, and a large amount of game balls are paid out during the pattern A opening / closing execution mode. If so, it is clearly a fraud. Then, during the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, there is no problem regarding unauthorized monitoring even if the hall computer HC does not know that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpots in which no external output is performed during the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, there is no problem regarding unauthorized monitoring. In addition, there is no problem with management for the purpose of adjusting the nails of the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the low frequency support mode, since the low frequency support mode is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends, when the pattern A is switched to the open / close execution mode, There is no problem with respect to monitoring whether the situation where the winning to the lower operating port 34 frequently occurs is normal or fraudulent.

  Next, a case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed based on the fact that the result is the explicit high probability winning result A will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 32A shows the output status of commands from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 72, FIG. 32B shows the open / close status of the big prize opening 32a, and FIG. FIG. 32D shows the execution status of the common performance that is executed in common in the opening / closing execution modes of Pattern A to Pattern C, and FIG. FIG. 32 (e) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a, and FIG. 32 (f) shows the main control device 71 to the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b. 32 (g) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, and FIG. 32 (h) shows the execution status of the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2. Indicates. The hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c among the external terminals 81a to 81c. In the second display unit DC2, the external computer through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is externally connected. A case where the output status is reflected will be described.

  When the game end effect is being executed, the game end effect is ended in response to a change end command being transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing t1. Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t <b> 2, and the common effect is started as the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, the signal output from the main control device 71 is started to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, but the signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not performed. . Further, since the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is not performed, notification during execution in the second display unit DC2 is not performed. However, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A this time, unlike the case of FIG. 31B, a delay time is set to delay the output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c.

  Thereafter, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the special winning opening 32a in the 1R round game is opened and closed in a short time mode. In this case, transmission of a round start command and transmission of a round end command are performed at relatively short intervals.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode is repeated, and counting of the waiting time for ending is started at the timing t4, which is the timing when the round game of the 15R ends. In this case, the effect in the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the common effect to the final effect. Thereby, as already explained, the player can grasp that the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the explicit high probability hit result A.

  Further, when the delay time elapses at the timing, signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is started, in-execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the final effect is ended when the ending standby time elapses, and a change command and a type command are transmitted from the main control device 71 to start a new game round. Further, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is terminated, the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2 is terminated.

  As described above, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed in response to the explicit high-accuracy big hit result A, the signal output of the main controller 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional big hit is performed. . When the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the low-frequency support mode, when the result is the explicit high probability hit result A and the pattern A is switched to the opening / closing execution mode, the low likelihood hit result A, the non-explicit high probability hit result A, or a special loss Unlike the case where the result is triggered, the high-frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode. Under such circumstances, even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c by the signal output of the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, the lower operating port It is possible to monitor whether the situation where the winning to 34 frequently occurs is regular or fraudulent.

  Moreover, the signal output of the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at a timing in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode. Accordingly, if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the game hall, even if the data counter DC is confirmed until the middle of the pattern A opening / closing execution mode, any game result is obtained. Since the player cannot grasp whether the game is triggered, the effect of causing the player to predict which game result is triggered when the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed is The pachinko machine 10 can be managed without disappearing.

  In particular, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not started in a situation where the common effect is being executed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of causing the player to predict which game result is triggered by visually recognizing the opening / closing mode and common effects of the special winning opening 32a. Can be performed.

  Even when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed when the low probability jackpot result A or the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A is triggered in the situation of the high frequency support mode, after the delay time has elapsed, Then, the signal output of the main controller 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform well management when the high-frequency support mode is maintained in response to the jackpot winning.

  Next, the case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed based on the fact that the explicit high probability winning result B is obtained will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 33A shows the output status of commands from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 72, FIG. 33B shows the open / close status of the big prize opening 32a, and FIG. FIG. 33 (d) shows the execution state of the definite effect indicating that it is the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, and shows the execution state of the common effect that is commonly executed in the pattern A to pattern C opening / closing execution mode, FIG. 33 (e) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a, FIG. 33 (f) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, FIG. 33 (g) shows an output state from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot, and FIG. 33 (h) shows an execution state of in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2. The hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c among the external terminals 81a to 81c. In the second display unit DC2, the external computer through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is externally connected. A case where the output status is reflected will be described.

  When the game end effect is being executed, the game end effect is ended in response to a change end command being transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing t1. Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t <b> 2, and the common effect is started as the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, but signal output to the condition jackpot external terminal 81a is not performed. Further, since the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is not performed, notification during execution in the second display unit DC2 is not performed. However, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A this time, unlike the case of FIG. 31B, a delay time is set to delay the output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c.

  Thereafter, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the 1R round game is started. Here, as already explained, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B triggered by the explicit high-probability big hit result B, since the opening of the special winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is performed 15 times in the 1R round game, t3 After the timing, the opening of the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode is repeated.

  After that, at the timing of t4, the common section in which the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening 32a is common in the opening / closing execution modes of the patterns A to C ends, and the effect in the opening / closing execution mode is changed from the common effect. Switch to final production. Thereby, as already explained, the player can grasp that this time is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B.

  Further, when the delay time elapses at the timing, signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is started, the in-execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2. Incidentally, since the 1R round game ends at the timing of t4, a round end command is transmitted.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as the second round game, the special winning opening 32a is opened once in a short time mode. In this case, the round start command and the round end command are transmitted at a relatively short interval.

  After that, at the timing of t6, opening of the big winning opening 32a in the 3R round game is started and a round start command is transmitted. Further, when the condition for ending the 3R round game is satisfied at the timing of t7, the special winning opening 32a is closed and a round end command is transmitted. In this case, the special winning opening 32a is opened in a long-time manner that allows the maximum number of round games to be won.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in a long-time manner is repeated, and at the timing t8, which is the timing at which the 15R round game ends, counting of the ending waiting time is started, and the main controller 71 The ending effect is started when the ending command is transmitted from. Then, at the timing of t9, when the waiting time for ending elapses, a change command and a type command are transmitted from the main controller 71, and a new game time is started. Further, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is terminated, the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2 is terminated.

  As described above, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed, a conditional jackpot is required until the opening of the big winning opening 32a in a long-time mode in which a lot of game balls are paid out is started. The main controller 71 outputs a signal to the external terminal 81c. As a result, during the period in which a large amount of game balls are paid out through the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, the large number of game balls are paid out. It is possible for the hall computer HC to recognize that this is through the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, similarly to the case of FIG. 32, it is possible to monitor whether the situation where the winning to the lower working port 34 frequently occurs is normal or fraudulent.

  Moreover, the signal output of the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at a timing in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode. Accordingly, if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the game hall, even if the data counter DC is confirmed until the middle of the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, any pattern A The player cannot grasp which pattern of ~ pattern C. Accordingly, the effect of causing the player to predict which pattern opening / closing execution mode is being executed in the common section in which the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 32a is common to the patterns A to C is lost. The pachinko machine 10 can be managed without any problems.

  In particular, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not started in a situation where the common effect is being executed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of allowing the player to predict which pattern opening / closing execution mode is being executed by visually recognizing the opening / closing mode and common effects of the special winning opening 32a. Can be performed.

  When the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed based on the low probability winning result B or the non-explicit high probability winning result B, the large winning opening 32a in the short-time mode in the 1R and 2R eyes is executed. Although the distribution of the number of times of opening is different, the other points are the same as in the case of FIG. Further, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, although the opening pattern of the 1R and 2R large winning openings 32a and the number of continuous opening of the large winning openings 32a in a short time mode are different, the main terminals for the external terminals 81a to 81c are different. The signal output pattern from the control device 71 and the output start timing are the same as in FIG.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  As a game result that is a result based on both the lottery determination and the allocation lottery in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode, the setting mode of the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode A plurality of types of game results are set by differentiating a plurality of types of elements such as the setting mode of the support mode, thereby diversifying the game. In this case, the frequency with which the predetermined control mode is selected as the open / close control mode of the special winning opening 32a from the start timing in the open / close execution mode to at least the middle timing differs depending on the subsequent contents. Thereby, the player can predict the contents determined as the subsequent progress destination by confirming the state of the variable winning device 32 after the start execution mode is started. Therefore, when the player enters the opening / closing execution mode, the player does not simply digest the opening / closing execution mode, but predicts whether the contents during or after the opening / closing execution mode are desirable for the player. It is expected to digest the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the opening / closing execution modes of the patterns A to C, the number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening 32a from the start timing to at least the middle timing and the opening mode of the big prize opening 32a at each time are common. Thereby, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, it is considered that the player plays a game while expecting that the subsequent contents become desirable at least in the common section. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a good feeling of expectation of the player when the opening / closing execution mode is started.

  In addition, in a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes having a common section, the number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening 32a in a short time mode including the common section is different. Thus, when the information for performing the prediction is provided by the number of times of opening / closing the special prize opening 32a according to the same mode, the elements that the player should pay attention to when making the prediction are clear. Further, according to this configuration, the player is expected to pay attention to the variable winning device 32 from the start of the opening / closing execution mode so as not to miss the count.

  In a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes, in the common section where the number of times of opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a and the opening manner of the big prize opening 32a in each time are common, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in a short time manner is repeatedly executed. Thereby, it is possible to change the state of the variable prize winning device 32 in the common section as compared with the configuration in which only one opening of the big prize opening 32a is continued in the common section while providing commonality in the common section. It becomes. Further, it is possible to give a common section while suppressing the number of balls entering the special winning opening 32a during the opening / closing execution mode from being extremely increased. In addition, the possibility that a maximum number of game balls will be won and the round game will be terminated while the grand prize opening 32a is being opened in the short time mode is reduced. It becomes easier for the player to confirm that the opening and closing is repeated a plurality of times.

  In order to enable management of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC of the game hall, in the configuration in which external output is made from the external terminal board 81 at the time of transition of the gaming state, etc., the external terminal board for conditional jackpots is connected to the external terminal board 81 81c is provided, and external output is not performed from the external terminal 81c in the common section. Thereby, even if the data counter DC is confirmed in the common section, the player cannot grasp the type of the open / close execution mode being executed and the game result that has triggered the transition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of setting the common section.

  Further, in the common section, a common effect is executed as a low identification effect so that the player cannot grasp the type of opening / closing execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the transition. As a result, the effect of setting the common section can be further enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be increased. In this case, external output is not performed from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in a situation where the common effect is being executed. Thereby, even if the data counter DC is confirmed in the situation where the common effect is being executed, the player cannot grasp the type of the open / close execution mode being executed or the game result that has triggered the transition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of performing the common performance.

  Here, in the case of a special losing result, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A in which payout of the game ball cannot be substantially expected is executed, and after execution of the opening / closing execution mode, Return to gaming state. That is, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special loss result is executed for production, and does not substantially contribute to the player's profit. Then, reflecting the number of times of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special outage result in the number information of the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC means that the selection of the pachinko machine 10 in which the player plays the game is the second display unit. It is not preferable for a player who wants to confirm the contents of DC2. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode transition triggered by the special outage result is not output externally, and when the opening / closing execution mode transition triggered by the jackpot result is output externally, the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed. By confirming the data counter DC in such a case, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a special outage result. In this case, the effect of setting the special outage result as the game result is lost. Under such circumstances, opening / closing execution triggered by the jackpot result is provided by providing the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot as described above and not performing external output related to execution of the opening / closing execution mode in the common section. While the execution of the mode can be managed, the effect of setting the special outlier result can be suitably obtained.

  In the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, external output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started before the common section elapses and the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. The Thereby, it is possible to satisfactorily manage the period during which a large amount of game balls are paid out during the opening / closing execution mode, while not losing the effect of setting the common section.

  When the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, from the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot until the common section elapses and the gaming state of the high-frequency support mode is started. Starts external output. As a result, while not losing the effect of setting the common section, the management of the winning frequency to the lower working port 34 and the monitoring of the act of attempting to open the electric accessory 34a illegally are performed satisfactorily. be able to.

  Since the external terminal 81d for support mode is provided separately from the external terminals 81a to 81c of the open / close execution mode system, the hall computer HC shifts to the open / close execution mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. And can be recognized separately. This makes it possible to manage whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, and manage whether or not the transition to the high-frequency support mode has been performed without triggering the end of the open / close execution mode. Can be done. In such a configuration, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the type of open / close execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the transition, external output is performed in any open / close execution mode. Otherwise, when the high frequency support mode is set, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, as described above, since the external output is performed in advance during the opening / closing execution mode when the high-frequency support mode is set, the management can be performed satisfactorily.

  In the low frequency support mode, when the game result is the low probability jackpot result A or the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A and the pattern A is switched to the opening / closing execution mode, no external output is triggered by the transition of the game state. . Thereby, in the low frequency support mode, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed in response to the special outlier result, the low probability big hit result A or the non-explicit high probability big hit result A, after the opening / closing execution mode However, from the data counter DC, it is not possible to grasp the game result that triggered the transition. Therefore, by setting the transition state of the gaming state as described above, not to lose the effect that it is possible to focus attention not only on the game in the opening / closing execution mode but also the game after the opening / closing execution mode, It is possible to manage the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall.

  Further, when the game balls are not substantially paid out during the opening / closing execution mode and the low-frequency support mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode, it is not necessary to perform external output during the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, even if the external output is not performed as described above, no problem occurs in the management of the pachinko machine 10.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the external output corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is different from that in the first embodiment. Below, the structure from which it differs is demonstrated. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, of the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal board 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10, the content of information output from the three external terminals 81a to 81c used when executing the opening / closing execution mode. Is different from the first embodiment.

  Specifically, the information indicating that the external terminal 81a used as the jackpot external terminal 81a in the first embodiment is in the open / close execution mode in which the large winning opening 32a is opened in a short-time manner. Used as the first external terminal 81a for outputting (first information or first signal).

  In addition, the external terminal 81b used as the external terminal 81b for the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment is information indicating that it is in the opening / closing execution mode in which the special winning opening 32a is opened in a long-time manner. Used as the second external terminal 81b for outputting (second information or second signal).

  The external terminal 81c used as the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the first embodiment is triggered by the jackpot result that the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is set to the high frequency support mode after the end. It is used as the third external terminal 81c for outputting information (third information or third signal) indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode.

  Since the information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode is output through the third external terminal 81c, the support mode external terminal 81d in the first embodiment outputs other information. Used for.

<About processing related to external output executed by main controller 71>
In the first embodiment, as processing for starting external output during the opening / closing execution mode, external output setting processing at the time of mode transition (FIG. 28) and delay external output setting processing (FIG. 29) are set. However, in this embodiment, the delay external output setting process is not set in these processes, and the processing contents of the external output setting process at the time of mode transition are different from those in the first embodiment. Yes.

<External output setting process during mode transition>
The external output setting process at the time of mode transition in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the external output setting process at the time of mode transition in the present embodiment is executed at the timing of step S511 in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15), as in the first embodiment.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is an opening / closing execution mode in which the special winning opening 32a is opened in a short-time manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is a game result that is neither the low probability big hit result C nor the most advantageous big hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, "1" is set in the first unit area 121 corresponding to the first external terminal 81a in the external output buffer 94d in step S1602. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output from the main control device 71 to the first external terminal 81a is started and attached to the first external terminal 81a. As information, the first signal can be output to the hall computer HC.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1601 or after the processing of step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603 to determine whether or not the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a special outage result. If the result is a special deviation result, the external output setting process is terminated without executing the processes related to the output setting of the second external terminal 81b and the third external terminal 81c in steps S1604 to S1607. In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode that is executed in response to a special failure result, external output through the first external terminal 81a is performed, but external output through the second external terminal 81b and through the third external terminal 81c. No external output is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1603, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the current open / close execution mode is an open / close execution mode in which the special winning opening 32a is opened in a long-time manner. Specifically, the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a game result that is neither a low-probable big hit result A, an unspecified high-probable big win result A, an explicit high-probable big hit result A, or a special outlier result. It is determined whether or not there is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, “1” is set in the second unit area 122 corresponding to the second external terminal 81b in the external output buffer 94d in step S1605. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output from the main control device 71 to the second external terminal 81b is started and attached to the second external terminal 81b. As information, the second signal can be output to the hall computer HC.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1604 or after the processing of step S1605 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1606, and the opening / closing execution triggered by the jackpot result in which the current opening / closing execution mode is set to the high-frequency support mode is completed. It is determined whether the mode. Specifically, if the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is one of the low probability jackpot result C, the explicit high probability jackpot result A to C, and the most advantageous jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1606. Affirmative determination. Also in step S1606, an affirmative determination is made in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of either the low likelihood hit results A to B or the unspecified high probability hit results A to B during the high frequency support mode. do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1606, the external output setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, “1” is set in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the third external terminal 81c in the external output buffer 94d in step S1607. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output from the main controller 71 to the third external terminal 81c is started and attached to the third external terminal 81c. As information, the third signal can be output to the hall computer HC. Thereafter, the external output setting process is terminated.

<Processing related to cancellation of signal output>
The situation in which signal output is being performed from the main control device 71 toward the first external terminal 81a and the second external terminal 81b is the external output cancellation process executed in step S413 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14). Canceled. Further, the situation in which signal output is being performed from the main control device 71 toward the third external terminal 81c is after the affirmative determination is made in step S503 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15) and when the mode is shifted. It is canceled before the external output setting process is started. However, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special loss result, the release processing is not executed. In addition to the above case, the signal output from the main control device 71 to the third external terminal 81c is less frequent after the high-frequency support mode has continued for 100 game times. It is also canceled when shifting to support mode.

<About processing executed by Hall computer HC>
Next, processing executed by the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the hall computer HC is configured to be electrically connected to only one external terminal among the plurality of external terminals 81a to 81c that output information accompanying execution of the opening / closing execution mode. However, in the present embodiment, all of the first external terminal 81a, the second external terminal 81b, and the third external terminal 81c are electrically connected. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is managed according to information output from the external terminals 81a to 81c.

<Management processing>
First, management processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is periodically started at a relatively short cycle of 1 msec.

  First, in step S1701, similarly to step S1501 in the first embodiment, the management target counter is updated. In subsequent step S1702, the reception confirmation process of the first to third signals is executed for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time.

  In the reception confirmation processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not reception of the first signal from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, information on the time at which reception of the first signal is started for the current management-target pachinko machine 10 is stored in the RAM 203 in step S1802. In the subsequent step S1803, a first reception start flag is set in the RAM 203 as information indicating that reception of the first signal has started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1801 or after the processing of step S1803 is executed, it is determined in step S1804 whether reception of the second signal from the current pachinko machine 10 to be managed is started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, in step S1805, information about the time when reception of the second signal is started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is stored in the RAM 203. In subsequent step S1806, a second reception start flag is set in RAM 203 as information indicating that reception of the second signal has started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1804, or after the processing in step S1806 is executed, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not reception of the third signal from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has started. If a negative determination is made in step S1807, the reception confirmation process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, information on the time at which reception of the third signal was started for the current management target pachinko machine 10 is stored in the RAM 203 in step S1808.

  Thereafter, in step S1809, a third reception start flag is set in the RAM 203 as information indicating that reception of the third signal has started, and in step S1810, information indicating that the third signal is being received. A third receiving flag is set in the RAM 203. Thereafter, the reception confirmation process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the management process (FIG. 35), after the process of step S1702 is executed, the processes after step S1703 are executed. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the second reception start flag is set in the RAM 203. If the second reception start flag is set, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the first reception start flag is set in the RAM 203.

  The situation in which the first reception start flag is not set while the second reception start flag is set is that the large winning opening 32a is not opened in a short time mode, and a long time has passed since the first opening. It means having shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special winning opening 32a is opened according to the mode. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705, and a control start process for the second display unit is executed. The specific contents of the process are the same as those in step S1504 in the first embodiment. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1709.

  The situation in which both the first reception start flag and the second reception start flag are set is that after the big prize opening 32a is opened in the short time mode, the big prize opening 32a is opened in the long time mode. It means that it has shifted to the open / close execution mode. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, and the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S 1706, the delay flag is set in the RAM 203 and “12950” is set in the delay timer counter DT provided in the RAM 203. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1709.

  The delay flag is information for the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC to recognize that the control start process of the second display unit is being delayed. The delay timer counter DT is a counter for the MPU 201 to know at which timing the situation where the execution of the control start process of the second display unit is delayed is canceled. Since the numerical information set in the delay timer counter DT is updated so that 1 is subtracted every 2 msec, the delay time (delay period) set in step S1706 is 25.9 sec. Similar to the first embodiment, this time is the same or substantially the same as the time required from the start timing to the end of the common section in the pattern A to pattern C opening / closing execution mode.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1707. Here, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, at least one of the first signal and the second signal is output from the pachinko machine 10, and therefore the negative determination in step S1703 is the reception of the first signal. Is started, but reception of the second signal is not started. That is, it means that the game has shifted to the pattern A opening / closing execution mode in which only the opening of the big prize opening 32a in the short time mode is performed without opening the big prize opening 32a in the long time mode or the medium time mode. In step S1707, it is determined whether the third reception start flag is set in the RAM 203 or not.

  The situation in which the first reception start flag and the third reception start flag are set while the second reception start flag is not set is an opening / closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by a jackpot result. This means that after the end, the mode has shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in which the high-frequency support mode is set. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1707, and the flow proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, as in step S1706, a delay flag is set in the RAM 203, and “12950” is set in a delay timer counter DT provided in the RAM 203. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1709.

  While the first reception start flag is set, the situation in which both the second reception start flag and the third reception start flag are not set is a transition to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by a special outage result. This means that the mode has been switched to the opening / closing execution mode in which the low-frequency support mode is set after the completion of the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S1707, and the process directly proceeds to step S1709.

  In step S1709, each reception start flag is cleared. In a succeeding step S1710, it is determined whether or not a delay flag is set in the RAM 203. If the delay flag is set, it is determined in step S1711 whether or not the numerical information of the delay timer counter DT is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the delay time has elapsed. If the delay timer counter DT is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1712.

  In step S1712, control start processing for the second display unit is executed. The specific contents of the process are the same as those in step S1504 in the first embodiment. Thereafter, the delay flag is cleared in step S1713.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1710, a negative determination is made in step S1711, or after the processing of step S1713 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1714. In step S1714, it is determined whether or not reception of at least one of the first signal and the second signal has been finished for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1714, in step S1715, reception of the signal for which the end of the current reception is confirmed among the first signal and the second signal for the currently managed pachinko machine 10 in RAM 203 is ended. Store the time information. In a succeeding step S1716, a control end process of the second display unit is executed. In this case, when the predetermined notification is executed on the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time, control for ending it is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1717, it is determined whether the third receiving flag is set in the RAM 203 or not. If the third receiving flag is set, a support mode related notification start process is executed in step S1718. The specific content of this process is the same as that in step S1511 in the first embodiment.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1714, a negative determination is made in step S1717, or after the processing of step S1718 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1719, and the current pachinko machine 10 to be managed is set to another external output. After executing the corresponding process, the management process is terminated. In step S1719, for example, when the reception of the third signal is completed, the RAM 203 stores information on the time at which the reception of the third signal for the currently managed pachinko machine 10 is completed, and the third receiving flag. And the notification indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is terminated. The other processing contents are the same as those in step S1512 in the first embodiment.

  By executing the management process as described above, the notification corresponding to the switching of the opening / closing execution mode in the data counter DC is performed in a manner corresponding to the type of the opening / closing execution mode related to the transition. That is, when the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is executed, the timing at which the common section in which the operation of the variable winning device 32 is common to the pattern A opening / closing execution mode ends is the timing corresponding to the common section. The notification in the data counter DC is started at a timing before the common effect is finished and the finalized effect is started.

  Further, when the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by the jackpot result in which the high-frequency support mode is set after the end is executed, the notification in the data counter DC is started at the timing when the common section ends. The Accordingly, as in the first embodiment, the execution management of the big prize opening 32a in the long-time mode and the transition management to the high frequency support mode are performed without losing the effect of setting the common section and the common performance. It can be done well.

<Management data output processing>
Next, management data output processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management data output process is periodically started at a relatively short cycle of 1 msec while avoiding being started simultaneously with the management process.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether a management data output request has been made. The hall computer HC is connected with an information input device such as a keyboard and a display device such as a display for outputting and displaying information corresponding to the processing result. The administrator of the game hall uses the information input device while viewing the display device. A program that allows the management data of the desired pachinko machine 10 to be read by operation is stored in advance. In step S1901, it is determined whether a management data output request has been made through an operation of the information input device by the administrator.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the management data output process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, a grasping process of the machine number is executed in step S1902 in order to grasp the pachinko machine 10 related to the current output request. That is, when the administrator performs an operation for reading out the management data of the desired pachinko machine 10, in addition to the operation for reading, an input of a machine number that is information for specifying the desired pachinko machine 10 is performed. The operation is performed. In step S1902, the information of the input unit number is grasped.

  In subsequent step S1903, management data extraction processing is executed. In the extraction processing, information indicating the reception start time and reception end time of each signal is read from the management data created in the RAM 203 for the pachinko machine 10 with the serial number identified in step S1902, and the read information is Create data arranged in time series.

  Note that when the reception start time is stored in the RAM 203 in Step S1802, Step S1805, and Step S1808, or when the reception end time is stored in the RAM 203 in Step S1715 and Step S1719, the target pachinko machine 10 is used. Is stored in association with each other. Therefore, in the process of step S1903, extraction by machine number can be performed.

  Thereafter, in step S1904, processing for outputting the data created in step S1903 to the display screen of the display device is executed. Then, the management data output process is terminated.

  By executing the management data output process as described above, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to check the data of 10 pachinko machines as shown in FIG. 37 (b). Accordingly, the number of times of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the time of staying in the opening / closing execution mode, the number of times of shifting to the high frequency support mode, the time of staying in the high frequency support mode, etc. It becomes possible to grasp and appropriate pachinko machine 10 management can be performed. For example, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 37 (b), it is possible to perform the ball adjustment such as the nail adjustment by checking the generation information of the prize ball and each of the above information, and the illegal The presence or absence can be confirmed satisfactorily.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, regardless of the type, any signal is output at the start timing, and information about the reception start time is stored in the RAM 203. Thus, in the configuration in which the notification indicating that the data counter DC has shifted to the opening / closing execution mode is delayed or not performed depending on the type of the opening / closing execution mode and the setting status of the support mode after the end, the hall computer HC In the management data, information on the start time of the opening / closing execution mode is stored regardless of the notification execution status. Therefore, execution management of the opening / closing execution mode can be performed satisfactorily.

  The management data stores not only information at the start of reception of the first signal and information at the end of reception, but also information at the start of reception of the second signal and at the end of reception. Therefore, as the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a, a short-time mode and a long-time mode are set, and an opening / closing execution mode in which only one of them is executed is set, and the opening mode is switched in the middle. In the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode is set, it is possible to distinguish and recognize a section in which a large amount of prize balls are generated and a section in which no prize balls are substantially generated.

  In particular, since a winning to the variable winning device 32 can occur even in a section where a short time mode is opened, registration of information related to the generation of the section in the management data is not omitted, By registering information relating to occurrence in the management data, it is possible to manage the occurrence of prize balls in a favorable manner.

  Further, in the management data, not only information at the start of reception of the first signal and information at the end of reception but also information at the start of reception of the third signal and at the end of reception is stored. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily manage the number of times of the opening / closing execution mode that has triggered the transition to the high frequency support mode.

  The period in which the management data is stored and held in the RAM 203 is arbitrary, and may be updated every day or may be updated every several days. In a configuration in which management data is stored and held for a plurality of days, when data of a predetermined pachinko machine 10 is read, information for all days stored and held may be read. Only the information corresponding to the date specified by may be read out.

  Although explanation is omitted in the first embodiment, the management data output process is also executed in the gaming system in the first embodiment.

  Further, even when the hall computer HC continues to receive the third signal, the hall computer HC recognizes that it is in the opening / closing execution mode through the reception of the first signal or the second signal. It is good also as a structure which interrupts | reports which shows that is in high frequency support mode.

  Further, when the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 enters the opening / closing execution mode that triggers the output of the third signal during the output of the third signal, the output of the third signal is interrupted by the hall computer HC. It may be configured to intentionally interrupt the output of the third signal to the extent that can be recognized. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the output is switched from the state in which the third signal is output to the state in which the output is stopped, and then the output of the third signal is resumed when a predetermined wait time has elapsed. In this case, the hall computer HC can individually recognize the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode that triggers the output of the third signal, and can reflect the occurrence state in the management data.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the external output corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is different from that in the first embodiment. Below, the structure from which it differs is demonstrated. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, of the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal board 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10, the content of information output from the three external terminals 81a to 81c used when executing the opening / closing execution mode. Is different from the first embodiment.

  Specifically, the external terminal 81a used as the jackpot external terminal 81a in the first embodiment is not related to whether the game result that triggered the transition is a jackpot result or a special missed result. The first external terminal 81a is used to output information (first information or first signal) indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress.

  The external terminal 81b used as the external terminal 81b for the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment is that the opening of the big prize opening 32a due to the long-time mode occurs in the next opening and the opening. It is used as the second external terminal 81b for outputting information (second information or second signal) indicating that the

  The external terminal 81c used as the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the first embodiment is triggered by the jackpot result that the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is set to the high frequency support mode after the end. In the open / close execution mode, the ending standby time is started and used as the third external terminal 81c for outputting information (third information or third signal) indicating that it is in the standby time.

  In addition, since the state in which the signal is output from the third external terminal 81c is canceled when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the external terminal board 81 has a high frequency support as in the first embodiment. An external terminal 81d for support mode is provided as a terminal for outputting information indicating that the mode is in progress.

<About processing related to external output executed by main controller 71>
In the first embodiment, as processing for starting external output during the opening / closing execution mode, external output setting processing at the time of mode transition (FIG. 28) and delay external output setting processing (FIG. 29) are set. However, in this embodiment, these processes are not set, and an alternative process is executed in the game state transition process.

<Game state transition processing>
Hereinafter, the gaming state transition process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the picture on the main display unit 43 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is. If it is the timing when the variable display is completed, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the game result of the game times ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current game result is a special outage result. If the result is a special loss result, in step S2005, the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 is one end condition of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special loss result. “9” is set as the upper limit number. In step S2006, “15” is set in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

  On the other hand, if the result is not a special loss result, that is, if it is any jackpot result, “15” is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S2007. After executing the process in step S2007, a round setting process is executed in step S2008. The processing content of the setting process for the round is the same as that in the first embodiment.

  After executing the processing of step S2006 or step S2008, in step S2009, “2000” is set as an opening standby time (standby period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. After executing the process of step S2009, an opening command is set in step S2010.

  Thereafter, in step S2011, “1” is set in the first unit area 121 corresponding to the first external terminal 81a in the external output buffer 94d. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output from the main control device 71 to the first external terminal 81a is started and attached to the first external terminal 81a. As information, the first signal can be output to the hall computer HC. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2012 to execute a special winning opening / closing process. Thereafter, after executing at least one of steps S2013 to S2014, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. In addition, since the processing content of step S2013-step S2016 is the same as the processing content of step S514-step S517 in the said 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening / closing process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 32a is open. If the big prize opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0”, and whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S2103. Determine whether or not.

  When the value of the opening / closing counter SOC is “0” or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the big prize opening opening / closing process is finished as it is. If the value of the open / close counter SOC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the big prize opening opening / closing process is executed after the big prize opening opening process is executed in step S2104. finish.

  The special winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently being executed is one of the low-accuracy large hit result A, the unspecified high-probable big hit result A, the explicit high-probable big hit result A, and the special outlier result. It is determined whether it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, "30" is set to the timer counter T in step S2202.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2201, in step S2203, the situation where the current winning prize opening process is started is that the gaming result that has been the trigger is the low probability big hit result B and the 1st to The game result that corresponds to the 2R eye or the above-mentioned opportunity is the non-explicit high-precision jackpot result B and the game result that corresponds to the 1R to 2R eyes or the above-mentioned trigger is the explicit high-precision jackpot result Whether it is B and corresponds to the 1st to 2R or the game result that is the above-mentioned opportunity is the explicit high probability hit result C and the 1R, and does not correspond to the final opening / closing timing , Is determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, "30" is set to the timer counter T in step S2202. If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, the situation where the current winning prize opening process is activated corresponds to the situation where the gaming result that is the above-mentioned trigger is the explicit high-accuracy big hit result C and the first opening and closing timing. Judge whether it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, "10000" is set to the timer counter T in step S2205. Thereafter, in step S2206, “1” is set in the second unit area 122 corresponding to the second external terminal 81b in the external output buffer 94d. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output from the main control device 71 to the second external terminal 81b is started and attached to the second external terminal 81b. As information, the second signal can be output to the hall computer HC.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2204, “14500” is set to the timer counter T in step S2207. Thereafter, in step S2208, “1” is set in the second unit area 122 corresponding to the second external terminal 81b in the external output buffer 94d. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output from the main control device 71 to the second external terminal 81b is started and attached to the second external terminal 81b. As information, the second signal can be output to the hall computer HC.

  After executing the process of step S2202, step S2206 or step S2208, the release execution process is executed in step S2209. In the opening execution process, the variable winning driving unit 32c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 32a is in an open state. In the subsequent step S2210, it is determined whether or not the current opening of the special winning opening 32a is related to a new start of the round game in the round number regulation mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2210, after a round start command is set in step S2211, the main prize opening opening process is terminated, and if a negative determination is made in step S2210, the main prize is received. The mouth opening process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the special winning opening / closing process (FIG. 39), if it is determined in step S2101 that the special winning opening 32a is open, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, by determining whether or not the timer counter T is “0”, it is determined whether or not the opening continuation time has elapsed with respect to the current opening of the big prize opening 32a. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2106.

  In step S2106, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize winning opening 32a. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. If a winning has occurred, the numerical information of the winning counter PC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S2107. In the following step S2108, it is determined whether or not this time is the 1R round of the round number regulation mode and the opening state of the variable winning device 32 is a short time state. If this is the case, a premium command is set in step S2109.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2108 or after the processing of step S2109 is executed, it is determined in step S2110 whether or not the winning counter PC is “0”. If the winning counter PC is not “0”, the main winning opening / closing process is terminated. If the winning counter PC is “0”, a closing execution process is executed in step S2111.

  In subsequent step S2112, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special outage result. If the result is not a special loss result, a round end command is set in step S2113.

  In subsequent step S2114, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted, and then in step S2115, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, a round setting process is executed in step S2116. The processing content of the setting process for the round is the same as that in the first embodiment. Thereafter, in step S2117, “750” is set in the timer counter T, and then the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2112 that the game result that triggered the transition is a special outage result, or if it is determined in step S2115 that the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2118. In step S2118, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is a jackpot result, and the support mode of the electric accessory 34a becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2118, “1” is set in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the third external terminal 81c in the external output buffer 94d in step S2119. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output from the main controller 71 to the third external terminal 81c is started and attached to the third external terminal 81c. As information, the third signal can be output to the hall computer HC.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2118 or after the processing in step S2119 is executed, “3000” is set as a ending waiting time (waiting period) in the timer counter T in step S2120. Then, after setting an ending command in step S2121, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2105 that the timer counter T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2122. In addition, since the processing content of step S2122-step S2128 is the same as the processing content of step S720-step S726 in the said 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Processing related to cancellation of signal output>
The situation in which signal output is being performed from the main controller 71 toward the first external terminal 81a, the second external terminal 81b, and the third external terminal 81c is executed in step S413 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14). Canceled by external output cancellation processing. Further, as already described, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the support mode external terminal 81d is provided, and information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is being performed through the external terminal 81d. Is output. In this case, the processing configuration related to the start and release of the output is the same as that in the first embodiment.

<About processing executed by Hall computer HC>
Next, processing executed by the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the hall computer HC is configured to be electrically connected to only one external terminal among the plurality of external terminals 81a to 81c that output information accompanying execution of the opening / closing execution mode. However, in the present embodiment, all of the first external terminal 81a, the second external terminal 81b, and the third external terminal 81c are electrically connected. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is managed according to information output from the external terminals 81a to 81c.

<Management processing>
The management processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is periodically started at a relatively short cycle of 1 msec.

  First, in step S2301, the management target counter provided in the RAM 203 of the hall computer HC is updated. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is changed from the previous time.

  In a succeeding step S2302, it is determined whether or not reception of the first signal is started from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, information on the time at which reception of the first signal was started for the current management-target pachinko machine 10 is stored in the RAM 203 in step S2303.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2302, or after execution of the processing in step S2303, it is determined in step S2304 whether reception of the second signal from the current management target pachinko machine 10 has started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 2304, in step S 2305, information on the time at which reception of the second signal for the currently managed pachinko machine 10 is started is stored in the RAM 203. In a succeeding step S2306, a control start process of the second display unit is executed. The specific contents of the process are the same as those in step S1504 in the first embodiment.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2304 or after execution of the process of step S2306, it is determined in step S2307 whether reception of the third signal from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2307, in step S2308, information about the time at which reception of the third signal for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed at this time is started is stored in the RAM 203.

  In subsequent step S2309, it is determined whether or not notification indicating that the open / close execution mode is being performed is performed on the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If a negative determination is made in step S2309, a control start process for the second display unit is executed in step S2310. The specific contents of the process are the same as those in step S1504 in the first embodiment.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2307, an affirmative determination is made in step S2309, or after execution of the process in step S2310, the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, it is determined whether or not at least one reception of the first signal, the second signal, and the third signal has been completed for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2311, in step S2312, the signal that the end of the current reception is confirmed in the RAM 203 for the currently managed pachinko machine 10 among the first signal, the second signal, and the third signal. Stores information about the time at which reception of was terminated. In a succeeding step S2313, a control end process of the second display unit is executed. In this case, when the predetermined notification is executed on the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time, control for ending it is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2311, or after execution of the processing in step S2313, other signal handling processing is executed in step S2314. Specifically, the same processing as in steps S1508 to S1512 in the first embodiment is executed. Thereafter, this management process is terminated.

  By executing the management process as described above, the notification corresponding to the switching of the opening / closing execution mode in the data counter DC is performed in a manner corresponding to the type of the opening / closing execution mode related to the transition. That is, when the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is executed, the timing at which the common section in which the operation of the variable winning device 32 is common to the pattern A opening / closing execution mode ends is the timing corresponding to the common section. The notification in the data counter DC is started at a timing before the common effect is finished and the finalized effect is started.

  Further, when the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by the jackpot result in which the high-frequency support mode is set after the end is executed, the notification in the data counter DC is started at the timing when the common section ends. The Accordingly, as in the first embodiment, the execution management of the big prize opening 32a in the long-time mode and the transition management to the high frequency support mode are performed without losing the effect of setting the common section and the common performance. It can be done well.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the timing for starting the output of the second signal and the third signal is determined in relation to the execution order with other processing in the program. Unlike the second embodiment, it is not necessary to measure the delay time. That is, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while omitting a hardware configuration and a software configuration related to the delay time measurement.

  Further, although description by illustration is omitted, management data output processing is executed even in the present embodiment. In this case, in this embodiment, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, output of the first signal is started at the start timing regardless of the type, and information on the reception start time is stored in the RAM 203. The Thus, in the configuration in which the notification indicating that the data counter DC has shifted to the opening / closing execution mode is delayed or not performed depending on the type of the opening / closing execution mode and the setting status of the support mode after the end, the hall computer HC In the management data, information on the start time of the opening / closing execution mode is stored regardless of the notification execution status. Therefore, execution management of the opening / closing execution mode can be performed satisfactorily.

  The management data stores not only information at the start of reception of the first signal and information at the end of reception, but also information at the start of reception of the second signal and at the end of reception. Therefore, as the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a, a short-time mode and a long-time mode are set, and an opening / closing execution mode in which only one of them is executed is set, and the opening mode is switched in the middle. In the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode is set, it is possible to distinguish and recognize a section in which a large amount of prize balls are generated and a section in which no prize balls are substantially generated.

  In particular, since a winning to the variable winning device 32 can occur even in a section where a short time mode is opened, registration of information related to the generation of the section in the management data is not omitted, By registering information relating to occurrence in the management data, it is possible to manage the occurrence of prize balls in a favorable manner.

  Further, in the management data, not only information at the start of reception of the first signal and information at the end of reception but also information at the start of reception of the third signal and at the end of reception is stored. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily manage the number of times of the opening / closing execution mode that has triggered the transition to the high frequency support mode.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied alone to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination.

  (1) The delay time of the signal output from the main controller 71 with respect to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the case of shifting to the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is not limited to that of the first embodiment.

  (1-1) For example, the delay time may be set as a time until a timing in the middle of a common section in which the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 32a is common. More specifically, in the common section, the delay time as the timing until the middle timing in the last opening time of the special winning opening 32a or the middle timing in the waiting time between the last opening time and the immediately preceding opening time. May be configured.

  In the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the delay time elapses, or may be configured to end when the delay time elapses, and after the delay time elapses, It may be configured to end before the end timing, may be configured to end at the timing when the common section ends, or may be configured to end after the common section ends. However, considering that the symbol display device 41 is the most easily noticed by the player among the common section of the big prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, after the common effect is finished. Alternatively, it is preferable that the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at the end timing.

  (1-2) The delay time may be set as the time until the timing after the common section in which the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. However, in order to be able to start signal output after the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is finished and before the gaming state in the high frequency support mode is started, the final opening times of the big winning opening 32a in the common section are A configuration in which signal output from the main controller 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is started before the ending standby time elapses after the end, more specifically, during the ending standby time It is preferable that

  Moreover, in the said structure, a common production | generation is good also as a structure which is complete | finished by the time when a common area is complete | finished, and it is good also as a structure which is complete | finished at the timing which a common area is complete | finished, and delay time passes since the common area is complete | finished. It is good also as a structure which is complete | finished by the time, and a structure which is complete | finished when delay time passes, and it is good also as a structure which complete | finishes after delay time passes. However, among the common section of the big prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is the most easily noticed by the player, and the next most easily noticed is the big prize. In view of the mouth 32a, the common section ends at the same time as the common effect or the common section ends after the common effect ends, and then a signal from the main controller 71 for the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot It is preferable that the output is started.

  (1-3) In the second embodiment, the notification start timing in the data counter DC in the case of shifting to the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is related to the common performance and the common section (1-1). ) Or (1-2). In this case, it is necessary to change the delay time measured in the hall computer HC accordingly.

  (1-4) Further, in the third embodiment, the notification start timing in the data counter DC when the pattern A is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is related to the common performance or the common section (1-1). ) Or (1-2). In this case, the timing for starting the output of the third signal in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 needs to be changed accordingly.

  (2) The delay time of the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c when the pattern B is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to that of the first embodiment.

  (2-1) For example, the delay time may be set as the time until the timing in the middle of the common section in which the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. More specifically, in the common section, the delay time as the timing until the middle timing in the last opening time of the special winning opening 32a or the middle timing in the waiting time between the last opening time and the immediately preceding opening time. May be configured.

  In the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the delay time elapses, or may be configured to end when the delay time elapses, and after the delay time elapses, It may be configured to end before the end timing, may be configured to end at the timing when the common section ends, or may be configured to end after the common section ends. However, considering that the symbol display device 41 is the most easily noticed by the player among the common section of the big prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, after the common effect is finished. Alternatively, it is preferable that the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at the end timing.

  (2-2) The delay time may be set as the time until the timing after the common section in which the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. For example, the signal output from the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c may be started after the opening of the special winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. However, in order to satisfactorily manage the opening of the big prize opening 32a in the long time mode, it is preferable that the signal output is started before the opening of the big winning hole 32a in the long time mode is started. Further, in order to be able to start signal output before the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the long time mode is started, the long time mode after the last opening of the big winning port 32a in the common section is completed. It is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is started before the opening of the special winning opening 32a is started.

  More specifically, the conditional jackpot is after the timing when the final opening of the big prize opening 32a in the short-time mode ends and before the timing at which the opening of the big prize port 32a in the long-time mode starts. The signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c may be started. In particular, in the configuration in which the number of times of opening of the special winning opening 32a in the short-time mode executed from the start timing in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is the same as that in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, after the common section ends. It is preferable that the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started during the waiting time until the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the long time mode is started. Incidentally, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, a configuration in which the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened in the short-time mode executed from its start timing is the same as that in the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is the delay time as in the above embodiment. May be applied to the configuration in which is set, or may be applied to the configuration of (1-1), (1-2), or (2-1).

  Moreover, in the said structure, a common production | generation is good also as a structure which is complete | finished by the time when a common area is complete | finished, and it is good also as a structure which is complete | finished at the timing which a common area is complete | finished, and delay time passes since the common area is complete | finished. It is good also as a structure which is complete | finished by the time, and a structure which is complete | finished when delay time passes, and it is good also as a structure which complete | finishes after delay time passes. However, among the common section of the big prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is the most easily noticed by the player, and the next most easily noticed is the big prize. In view of the mouth 32a, the common section ends at the same time as the common effect or the common section ends after the common effect ends, and then a signal from the main controller 71 for the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot It is preferable that the output is started.

  (2-3) In the second embodiment, the notification start timing in the data counter DC when the pattern B is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode is set to the big prize opening according to the common effect, the common section, or the long-time mode. You may change like (2-1) and (2-2) in relation to the area where opening of 32a is performed. In this case, it is necessary to change the delay time measured in the hall computer HC accordingly.

  (2-4) In the third embodiment, the notification start timing at the data counter DC when the pattern B is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B is the big prize opening in the common effect, common section, or long-time mode. You may change like (2-1) and (2-2) in relation to the area where opening of 32a is performed. In this case, the timing for starting the output of the second signal in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 needs to be changed accordingly.

  (3) The signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c at the timing when the common section ends in the pattern A opening / closing execution mode and the pattern B opening / closing execution mode as in the first embodiment. In the configuration in which the common effect is started, the common effect may be ended before the timing, or the common effect may be ended after the timing. However, in view of the fact that the symbol display device 41 is the most easily noticed by the player among the common section of the big prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the common effect is the same as the above timing. It is preferable to set it as the structure which complete | finishes at the same timing or the timing before it.

  Moreover, you may apply another pattern of the end timing of a common effect as mentioned above with respect to the said 2nd Embodiment or the said 3rd Embodiment.

  (4) In the first embodiment, the delay time of the signal output may be different among the plural types of opening / closing execution modes that are the targets of the delay of the signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c. Good. For example, as in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, in the opening / closing execution mode in which the large winning opening 32a is opened after a common section for a long period of time, the pattern A opening / closing is triggered by the explicit high probability winning result A. As in the execution mode, a configuration is conceivable in which the section in which the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is performed in a short time mode is shorter than the opening / closing execution mode in which the high frequency support mode is set after the common section. In this case, in the former opening / closing execution mode, it is preferable to perform the external output at a timing before the opening of the big prize opening 32a in a long-time manner, whereas in the latter opening / closing execution mode, for example, a special loss result In some cases, it is preferable to delay the external output until the ending of the opening / closing execution mode is started in order to share the operation mode with the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the above. In such a case, it is preferable to prepare a first delay time for the former opening / closing execution mode and a second delay time for the latter opening / closing execution mode.

  The delay time of signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c may be different between the pattern B opening / closing execution mode and the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. That is, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, a signal is output before the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the long time mode is started after the section in which the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short time mode is performed 16 times ends. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C, the section in which the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short time mode is performed 18 times ends and the opening of the big winning hole 32a in the long time mode is started. A configuration may be adopted in which signal output is started before.

  Further, the delay time is not limited to the configuration in which two types are set, and may be a configuration in which three types or four or more types are set. Alternatively, the delay time may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with the type of opening / closing execution mode to be delayed for external output, or the delay time may be set for each predetermined combination. Also good.

  (5) In the second embodiment, the period from the start timing to the timing at which notification at the data counter DC is started among a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes subject to notification delay at the data counter DC. However, it is good also as a structure which is different like said (4). In this case, when both the first signal and the second signal are received (ie, step S1706), the second signal is not received and both the first signal and the third signal are received. In some cases (ie, step S1708), different delay times may be set.

  In the second embodiment, the notification start timing of the data counter DC may be different between the pattern B opening / closing execution mode and the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. In other words, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the data counter is set before the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the long time mode is started after the section in which the opening / closing of the big winning port 32a in the short time mode is performed 16 times ends. While the DC notification is started, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the section in which the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short time mode is performed 18 times ends, and the opening of the big prize opening 32a in the long time mode starts. It is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting by data counter DC is started before it is made.

  However, in the configuration in which the hall computer HC identifies the type of the opening / closing execution mode by the combination of the output of a plurality of types of signals as in the second embodiment, the pattern B opening / closing execution mode and the pattern C opening / closing execution are performed. It is necessary to newly provide a configuration related to signal output for enabling discrimination between modes. As a specific configuration enabling the identification, a configuration in which the output start timing of the second signal is made different depending on the type of each opening / closing execution mode is conceivable. In addition, the number of external terminals and signal lines connecting the external terminals and the hall computer HC will increase, but the pachinko machine 10 A configuration in which a signal path to the hall computer HC is provided is conceivable. Further, in the configuration in which the first to third signals are output when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the output timing of these signals is made different at a level at which the hall computer HC can recognize the reception order, and the type of the opening / closing execution mode A configuration in which the output order of signals is made different according to the above is conceivable.

  In the third embodiment, the period from the start timing to the timing at which the notification at the data counter DC is started is between a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes that are targets of notification at the data counter DC. It is good also as a different structure like said (4).

  (6) In the first embodiment, not only the information indicating that the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is in the open / close execution mode but also the information indicating that it is in the high-frequency support mode is output. It may be a terminal used for the above. For example, when the game state transition mode is the high frequency support mode after the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the external output is opened / closed when the external output is started in the middle of the pattern B opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure continued after completion | finish of execution mode, and also continuing during high frequency support mode. Further, for example, in the case of a transition state of a gaming state in which the high frequency support mode is set after the pattern A opening / closing execution mode, when external output is started in the middle of the pattern A opening / closing execution mode, the external output May be continued even after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and may be continued during the high-frequency support mode.

  (7) In each of the embodiments described above, the low output jackpot result A and the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A may be configured such that external output is not performed regardless of the type of support mode when the game result is obtained. In other words, in the case of a game result that does not favorably shift the advantage of a specific element from disadvantage to the execution of a specific game state, or a specific game state that progresses in a mode of low expectation of granting a predetermined privilege In the case of a game result in which the advantageous degree of a specific element cannot be advantageously shifted from disadvantageous with the execution of the above, it may be configured such that external output is not performed. In this configuration, even when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed in response to any of the special out-of-order result, the low likelihood hit result A and the non-explicit high probability hit result A in the high frequency support mode, It is possible to make the player predict which game result is triggered after the execution mode.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, as a transition mode of the gaming state, when a low probability hit result is obtained during the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode, but the low probability mode is set during the low probability mode. A transition mode in which the low-frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot result is obtained may be set. In this case, in the first embodiment, the former performs external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c during the opening / closing execution mode, whereas the latter performs the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c during the opening / closing execution mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which no external output is performed through the network. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the former is notified in the data counter DC during the opening / closing execution mode, but the latter may be configured such that the notification in the data counter DC is not performed during the opening / closing execution mode.

  (9) In each of the above embodiments, the specific element or specific means for changing the player's degree of advantage after the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to the configuration in the support mode, but may be the configuration in the validity lottery mode. Good.

  Also, after the opening / closing execution mode, it becomes possible to win a special winning device or it is easy for a winning to occur, and opening and closing that is advantageous to the player without going through a lottery lottery based on the occurrence of winning in the special winning device At least a configuration for selectively performing external output in each of the above embodiments, a configuration for selectively performing notification in the data counter DC, and a configuration for selectively registering in management data with respect to the configuration for shifting to the execution mode. Either may be applied.

  For example, a first mode in which a special winning device can be won after the opening / closing execution mode or a winning is likely to occur, and a second mode in which a special winning device cannot be won or the winning is difficult to occur after the opening / closing execution mode. In the configuration in which the mode is set, when the first mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode, the external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c as in the first embodiment is performed during the opening / closing execution mode. However, when the second mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode, the external output may not be performed during the opening / closing execution mode even if the trigger for the transition is a jackpot result. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the former is notified in the data counter DC during the opening / closing execution mode, but the latter may be configured such that the notification in the data counter DC is not performed during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the special winning device includes an advantageous opening that allows the game ball that has won the special winning device to pass through and that the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs without passing through the lottery based on the passing of the game ball. A distribution path that distributes game balls that have won a prize to the special prize device and either a disadvantage or a disadvantage that does not cause a transition to the open / close execution mode even if the game balls that have won a prize can pass through Or it is good also as a structure provided with a distribution apparatus and can visually recognize the distribution aspect of the said game ball from the pachinko machine 10 front.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the aspect in which the expected degree of granting the predetermined privilege is relatively high is the opening of the big prize opening 32a in the long-time aspect, and the expected degree of giving the predetermined privilege is relatively A low aspect is not limited to the structure which is the opening of the big winning opening 32a by a short time aspect, It is arbitrary.

  For example, the number of prize balls when a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 32a is relatively large (for example, 10 to 15), and a prize ball when a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 32a. It is good also as a structure by which the small payout mode with a relatively small number (for example, 1 piece or 2 pieces) is set. In this case, in the first embodiment, for example, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the transition is made to the multiple payout mode section after the small payout mode section has elapsed, and the small payout mode section is started. An external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c may be performed after the end of the multiple payout mode section or after the start of the multiple payout mode section. In each of the above embodiments, the data counter DC is notified after the low payout mode section is started and before the multiple payout mode section is completed or until the multiple payout mode section is started. It is good also as a structure performed.

  In addition, for example, a plurality of variable winning devices having different numbers of winning balls when a winning occurs are provided, and pattern A is opened / closed by selecting a variable winning device corresponding to the small payout mode as an opening target. The mode B may be configured, and the pattern B opening / closing execution mode may be performed by changing the opening target from a variable winning device corresponding to the small payout mode to a variable winning device corresponding to the multiple payout mode.

  (11) In the first embodiment, in order for the hall computer HC to recognize that it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is in the opening / closing execution mode satisfying a predetermined condition. Although the signal output is performed from the main control device 71, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal output from the main control device 71 is basically performed to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot. The signal output may be stopped during the opening / closing execution mode that satisfies a predetermined condition. Even with this configuration, it is possible to recognize that the hall computer HC is in the open / close execution mode. Such a signal output configuration may be applied to a support mode signal output. Further, the configuration of the signal output may be applied to the outputs of the first to third signals in the second embodiment and the third embodiment.

  (12) The timing at which external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D is not limited to that in the first embodiment, for example, waiting for opening The external output may be started when the predetermined time has elapsed, or the external output may be started when the opening standby time has elapsed, and the opening of the first big prize opening 32a is started. In this case, external output may be started. Further, the external output start timing is set as the external output start timing from the jackpot external terminal 81a in the pattern A to pattern C opening / closing execution mode or the external output start timing from the external terminal 81b for opening / closing execution mode. You may apply to. In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the timing at which notification is started in the data counter DC in the pattern D opening / closing execution mode may be changed as described above.

  (13) In the first embodiment, as a specific configuration for delaying external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, a configuration for measuring the delay time from the start of the opening / closing execution mode is used. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether a condition such as opening of the reference number of large winning openings 32a is started, opened, or ended, and the condition is satisfied In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started. Even in this case, the external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c can be delayed.

  For example, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the last short time mode included in the common section has ended, and if it has ended, the external through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot Alternatively, it may be configured to start the output, and instead of this, it is determined whether or not it is the timing immediately before the opening cycle in the first long-time mode is started, and if it is the timing, a conditional jackpot A configuration may be employed in which external output through the external terminal 81c is started.

  Further, for example, it is the timing when the measurement of the waiting time for ending is started in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A in which the support mode of the electric accessory 34a becomes the high-frequency support mode after the end, or the waiting time for ending Alternatively, it may be determined whether it is the timing when the measurement of the ending standby time is finished, and when it is the timing, external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c may be started.

  (14) The type of the opening / closing execution mode selected according to the success / failure lottery mode or the support mode when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode may be different, and the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 may be different. Different types of opening / closing execution modes may be selected depending on differences in conditions that trigger the acquisition of the hold information while the hold information is acquired separately for the occurrence of the winning. In such a configuration, the time for which the common section lasts may be different between the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the first situation and the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the second situation.

  When the configuration as described above is applied to the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 determines whether the first situation or the second situation, and the delay time corresponding to each of them is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which signal output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at the elapsed timing. When the above configuration is applied to each of the above-described embodiments, the notification start timing in the data counter DC may be different in correspondence with each of the first situation and the second situation. For example, when applied to the second embodiment, the output mode of the first to third signals from the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 is the same, and whether the first situation or the second situation is the pachinko The hall computer HC can recognize the signal according to the signal output from the machine 10. And in the said hall computer HC, it is good also as a structure which sets the delay time until the alerting | reporting in data counter DC is started according to the result of having determined whether it is the 1st condition or the 2nd condition.

  (15) In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an external terminal in one-to-one correspondence with the game mode transition mode, and the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer HC It is good also as a structure which provides the signal path | route between it corresponding to the transition mode of a gaming state on a one-to-one basis. In this case, the number of signal paths is increased as compared with the second and third embodiments, but the hall computer HC can recognize each transition mode individually.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, if the game result is the low probability winning result A, and the situation that is the game result is the low frequency support mode, after the opening / closing execution mode, the game times of the end reference count However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this, and even in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to continue until the game number of end reference times is consumed. It is good also as a structure which transfers to frequency support mode. In this case, a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the special loss result occurs in the case of any jackpot result in relation to the special loss result.

  In addition, when the low probability winning result A is obtained, instead of opening the big winning opening 32a in the short-time mode in each of the above embodiments, the product time of the launching period of the game ball and the upper limit number during the round game It is good also as a structure where the big winning opening 32a is open | released over the same, substantially the same, or the same time. Even in this case, if any jackpot result is obtained, a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the special loss result occurs.

  By the way, as the opening / closing execution mode when the non-explicit high-accuracy big hit result A is obtained, or as the opening / closing execution mode when another non-explicit high-precision big hit result is obtained, it is the same as the case where the low-accuracy big hit result A is obtained. It is good also as a structure by which the aspect which becomes the same in the appearance of the operation | movement of the variable winning apparatus 32 is set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which is easy to generate | occur | produce in the condition where these jackpot results are in high frequency support mode or in high frequency support mode, and are high probability mode. For example, in the configuration in which the holding information acquired for the occurrence of a prize is distinguished between the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 and the allocation destination of the jackpot result is different, the holding related to the upper operating port 33 is held. In the information, each of the jackpot results may not be set as the allocation destination, and in the hold information related to the lower operation port 34, each of the jackpot results may be set as the allocation destination. In this configuration, the upper limit number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode that is executed in common when the low probability winning result A and the non-explicit high probability winning result are obtained is smaller than in other opening / closing execution modes such as pattern D. (For example, the upper limit number is 2 times).

  In addition, the upper limit number during the round game is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, when the upper limit number is 10, the opening of the big prize opening 32a when opening according to the above aspect The time is 6 seconds.

  (17) In the opening / closing execution mode of the patterns A to C, instead of the configuration in which the common interval in which the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 according to the short-time mode is continuously executed is set, any pattern is used. Even if it exists, it is good also as a structure which sets the irregular area where the opening / closing aspect of the variable prize-winning apparatus 32 is determined at random. Even in this case, since it is difficult for the player to grasp which pattern opening / closing execution mode is in the irregular section, the subsequent contents will be desirable for the player in the irregular section. It is thought that the game will be performed with expectation. However, it is preferable to set the common section as described above in order to increase the clarity of the points to be noted when playing a game while expecting the subsequent contents to be desirable for the player. In addition, as the common section, at least one of the time during the opening and the time between successive opening is slightly different, but it may be configured such that a section having a mode that is difficult to identify on the whole is set.

  (18) In a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes, an irregular period → common section → non-common section or an individual section corresponding to each opening / closing execution mode may be set. Common section → irregular section → non-common A section or an individual section corresponding to each opening / closing execution mode may be set, or a common section → non-common section or an individual section → common section corresponding to each opening / closing execution mode may be set. In this case, in the first embodiment, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is stopped in the common section, and the main jack to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is stopped in the individual section. It is good also as a structure which performs the signal output from the control apparatus 71. FIG.

  (19) There may be a configuration in which there is no common section between the pattern A opening / closing execution mode and the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, and the operation of the variable winning device 32 is totally different. However, if the low-accuracy big hit result A, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result A, the explicit high-precision big hit result A, and the special outlier result, the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed, When the opening / closing execution mode A is executed, the player plays a game while expecting that the game result is advantageous to him.

  (20) Instead of the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode in the opening / closing number regulation mode is executed in the special deviation result, the opening / closing execution mode in the round number regulation mode may be executed. In this case, the upper limit number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode corresponding to the special loss result may be the same as the other round number regulation modes.

  (21) The upper limit number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode may be notified. Even if the notification is made, in the configuration of the above embodiment, since the upper limit number of round games in the round number regulation mode corresponding to the jackpot result is the same, it is difficult to grasp which jackpot result is triggered. can do.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of round games is notified as described above, the round number regulation mode is also executed in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special loss result or the jackpot result that causes the same game state transition. Even if the above notification is made, it is difficult to grasp which game result is triggered by making the upper limit number of round games the same as other round number regulation modes. It can be.

  (22) As an end condition for the round game, in place of the configuration in which winning of the upper limit number of game balls to the big winning opening 32a is set, for example, the variable winning device 32 is provided with an end timing, A configuration in which a ball can enter the end timing when the elapsed time of the round game reaches a predetermined elapsed time, and a configuration in which the round game ends when a game ball enters the end timing It is good.

  Further, as a condition for ending the round game, for example, instead of the configuration in which the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 and the duration are set from the start timing of the round game, for example, the round game is started and the big winning opening 32a is entered. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of winnings and the continuation time to the variable winning device 32 after the first winning is set are set as end conditions.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the big prize opening 32a is closed at the end of the round game, a configuration in which a transition of the round game occurs with the big prize opening 32a being opened may be employed.

  (23) At least some of the plurality of types of round number regulation modes may be configured such that the upper limit number of round games is different. In this case, between the round number regulation modes in which the upper limit number of round games is different, the number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening 32a and the opening / closing mode of each time may be visually similar.

  (24) The number of stages in which the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a changes during the round game is not limited to two stages, and may be three or more stages. In addition, it may be configured such that the big prize opening 32a is always opened only once in one round game, without opening the big prize opening 32a a plurality of times during the round game.

  In addition, the variable winning device 32 can receive a game ball, although it can switch between a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won. It may be configured to be able to switch between a state where the winning probability of the game ball flowing down the region is extremely low and a state where the winning probability of the game ball is dramatically higher than that state. Further, the variable winning device 32 is capable of winning a game ball and is expected to generate a game ball with a first probability, and a probability that a game ball will be expected to be generated in this state. It may be configured to be able to switch to a state in which a game ball winning is expected with a high second probability.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which switching of each said state is not performed through operation | movement of the opening-and-closing door 32b, but is performed through displacement of the variable prize-winning apparatus 32 itself.

  (25) Although the same opening mode is executed in each opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a, a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes with different opening / closing times of the big prize opening 32a may be set. For example, when the game state setting mode after execution of the opening / closing execution mode is different from each other in the first game result and the second game result, any of the plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes may be selected. However, the probability of selecting the opening / closing execution mode in which the number of opening / closing operations is a specific number of opening / closing operations may be different between the case of the first game result and the case of the second game result. In this case, it is good also as a structure by which a short time aspect is selected as an opening aspect of each time the special winning opening 32a. According to the said structure, while making the content of the privilege given to a player in the opening / closing execution mode the same, substantially the same, or the same, it makes a player predict the subsequent content through the control aspect of an opening / closing execution mode. It becomes possible.

  (26) The number of opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a and the setting pattern of the opening mode in the opening / closing execution mode of each pattern are not limited to those in each of the above-described embodiments, and are described individually in each of the above-described embodiments. It is optional as long as at least one of the effects can be achieved.

  Further, the upper limit number of each round game is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and may be any as long as at least one of the functions and effects described individually in each of the above embodiments can be achieved. It is. Further, the upper limit number may be different depending on the type of round number defining mode, or the upper limit number may be different between round games in the same round number defining mode.

  Further, the release mode by the short-time mode is not limited to a mode in which a winning to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur, and it is a time longer than the game ball firing cycle, and the game ball firing cycle × It is good also as a structure set to the time below n (one of n = 1, 2, 3). Further, although it is possible to substantially win the variable winning device 32 by making the release duration longer than the game ball launch cycle, the release duration is the launch cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number during the round game. It is good also as an aspect shorter than the product of, and it is good also as an aspect which is the same. Even in this case, in the situation where the big prize opening 32a is opened in a short time mode, the possibility that the upper limit number of round games will be awarded to the big prize opening 32a is reduced.

  (27) In a round game in which only the opening of the big winning opening 32a in a short time mode is performed, instead of a configuration in which the winning of the upper limit number of game balls set for the round game does not substantially occur, the upper limit It is good also as a structure which can generate | occur | produce the winning of a number of game balls. For example, the opening continuation time according to the opening mode of the big prize opening 32a executed in the round game is set to a time longer than the game ball firing cycle (for example, a range of 0.6 sec to 64 sec), and the opening continuation is further performed. The product of the time and the number of times of opening / closing the special winning opening 32a according to the opening mode is the same as or substantially the same as the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of round games, or 1 for the product It is set as the structure which is the value of 2 times or more and less than 2 times or 1 time or more and less than 3 times. In this case, depending on the manner in which the game balls flow down in the game area, the upper limit number of game balls may or may not be won in the round game.

  Further, as in the relationship between the opening / closing execution mode in the case of the low likelihood winning result B and the non-explicit high probability winning result B and the opening / closing execution mode in the case of the explicit high probability winning result B in each of the above embodiments, a plurality of consecutive rounds In the game, the game area is as described above for a configuration in which the total number of times of opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short-time mode executed in these round games is the same, but the distribution of the number of times of opening / closing in each round game is different. Depending on the flow-down mode of the game balls, a configuration may be applied in which the upper limit number of game balls may not be won in the round game, or a win may be generated.

  Specifically, in the other opening / closing execution mode, the number of times of opening / closing in the 1R short-time mode is set higher in the other opening / closing execution mode, but the number of opening / closing times in the 2R short-time mode is set low. In addition, there is a high probability that the upper limit number of game balls will be awarded in the 1Rth in the other opening / closing execution mode, and the upper limit number of game balls is won in at least one of the 1R and 2R in the one opening / closing execution mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of occurrence is low or substantially impossible, and the winning of the upper limit number of game balls is substantially impossible in the 2R in the other opening / closing execution mode. In this case, when a winning of the upper limit number of game balls is generated in the middle of the 1R in the other opening / closing execution mode, the total number of opening / closing times in the short-time mode in the 1R and 2R in the opening / closing execution mode is Since the total number of opening / closing operations in the short-time mode in the first and second opening execution modes of the one opening / closing execution mode is smaller, the player can recognize that the opening / closing execution mode is the other opening / closing execution mode. It becomes. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the mode of predicting which game result is.

  Incidentally, the one opening / closing execution mode may correspond to the low probability winning result B, and the other opening / closing execution mode may correspond to the implicit high probability winning result B.

  (28) As a short-time mode, a plurality of types of short-time modes may be set so that the appearance operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is the same although the exact opening duration time is different. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low probability big hit result A and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special loss result, the appearance of the variable winning device 32 is the same, but in each opening / closing of the big winning opening 32a. It is good also as a structure from which the kind of short-time aspect selected differs. Moreover, you may apply such a structure about a medium time aspect and a long time aspect.

  (29) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which a plurality of types of opening modes of the big winning opening 32a are set by changing the opening continuation time, the big winning prize is obtained by changing the opening degree of the big winning opening 32a such as half-opening or full opening. It is good also as a structure which sets the opening mode of the opening | mouth 32a in multiple types.

  (30) A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage of the gaming state that is shifted after the opening / closing execution mode is defined by the difference in the number of continuations in the high probability mode. In addition, the degree of advantage of the gaming state to be transferred after the opening / closing execution mode may not be defined by the winning / raising lottery mode, but may be defined by the presence / absence of the high-frequency support mode or the difference in the number of continuations.

  (31) Instead of a configuration in which a combination of symbols is always stopped and displayed in the game times in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the patterns A to C is performed, any stop result is selected at random. It may be a configuration that makes it difficult to grasp whether the mode is an opening / closing execution mode triggered by a game result. In this case, the randomly selected stop result may be configured not to include an aspect in which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on any effective line.

  (32) Instead of the configuration in which the same common effect is always executed in the pattern A opening / closing execution mode and the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, any one of a plurality of types of effects may be executed. In this case, the plurality of types of effects may be executed completely randomly.

  (33) One winning to the big prize opening 32a occurs in a situation where the execution condition of the premium effect is the first round of the round number regulation mode and the opening style of the big prize opening 32a is a short time aspect. The execution condition may be that a plurality of winnings are generated instead of the above-described configuration, and the execution condition may be that a lottery is executed in response to winning in the big winning opening 32a in the situation. . Further, as a condition for executing the premium effect, a condition that the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode may be added. In this case, the premium effect is an effect indicating that the high probability mode is confirmed. In addition, the execution mode of the premium effect is arbitrary. For example, the design display device 41 does not execute the effect, but the display lamp unit 58 or the speaker unit 59 may execute the effect.

  In addition, the combination of the low probability hit result B and the non-explicit high probability hit result B and the explicit high probability hit result B are not different in the number of times of opening and closing in the first round of the round number regulation mode, but the low likelihood hit result B The number of times of opening and closing may be different for the non-explicit high probability hit result B.

  (34) The combination of the pattern of each opening / closing execution mode and the pattern of the game state setting mode after execution of the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and is arbitrary. For example, in the case of a special deviation result, an opening / closing execution mode that is the same as or similar to any of the patterns B and C may be executed.

  (35) In the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2, the type for specifying the gaming state after execution of the opening / closing execution mode such as the low probability jackpot result, the non-explicit high jackpot result, the explicit high probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result A lottery is performed, and a counter for selecting the opening / closing execution mode may be provided separately. In this case, in the table in which the counter is associated with the pattern of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the numerical information of the counter, the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode to at least halfway timing is specified. It is good also as a structure prescribed | regulated so that the probability which becomes an aspect may differ according to the content performed after that.

  Alternatively, the jackpot type counter C2 may be omitted, and all game results may be distributed using numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1.

  Further, in place of the configuration in which the presence / absence of the special outage result is lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1, a special counter for the special outage result is separately provided to determine whether the special outage result is generated using the counter. It is good also as a structure. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the opening / closing frequency | count of the special winning opening 32a is varied and multiple types of special loss results are set. However, even in this case, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to each special loss result, the large winning opening 32a is opened in a short-time manner in each of the above embodiments, etc. It is preferable that the winning opening 32a is not generated.

  In each of the above embodiments, the probability of a special failure result is lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode. Instead, the probability of the special failure result in both modes is the same or substantially the same. The high probability mode may have a higher probability of a special failure result, or the high probability mode may not have a special failure result.

  (36) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 has priority. The structure digested may be applied, and conversely, the structure in which the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 34 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, It is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launch handle 55.

  Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 43 is acquired based on the first display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the winning of the lower operating port 34. A second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is correct may be provided. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (37) A player in a case where the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 is a target of the determination of the success and a case where the holding information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 is a target of the determination of the success or failure. It is good also as a structure from which the profit which is obtained differs. For example, when the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 33 is a target of the success / failure determination, the game result is distributed as in the above embodiment, but the holding information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 is used. May be assigned to either the most advantageous jackpot result or the low-probability jackpot result C.

  Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in the above embodiment, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (38) The symbol display device 41 or the dedicated display may be configured to notify that the predetermined opening / closing execution mode is executed, the number of game times is executed, and the high frequency support mode is in progress. In this case, instead of or in addition to the configuration relating to the external output in each of the above-described embodiments, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the sub-side control device (the sound emission control device 72 in each of the above-described embodiments) or the dedicated device A configuration in which the signal output timing to the display device is delayed, or a configuration in which signal output is not performed even when the opening / closing execution mode is shifted in a predetermined situation may be applied. In addition, the first output mode in which the signal output is performed in the same manner as the external output to the jackpot external terminal 81a in the first embodiment, and the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment. The second output mode in which the signal output is performed in the same manner as the external output to the external terminal 81b, and the same manner as the external output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the first embodiment. The third output mode in which the signal output is performed in this manner is stored in advance in the program of the main controller 71, and a game hall manager or the like can select any of the output modes by operating a predetermined manual operation unit. It is good also as a structure which can select these.

  In addition, a storage device for storing the duration time of the opening / closing execution mode and the duration time of the high frequency support mode in a predetermined mode is mounted according to the signal output from the main control device 71 and other control devices. The above configuration may be applied to the configuration. The storage device is considered to be used when performing nail adjustment according to the game ball exit, and can output a signal suitable for performing management for the nail adjustment.

  (39) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 71 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 111 is controlled by the sound emission control device 72 based on a command output from the main control device 71 The device 111 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 72. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main controller 71, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 71. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 72 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 72 to the display control device 111 are also arbitrary.

  (40) The device for executing the effect for the game times is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the effect for the game times is executed by operating the decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (41) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game turn in the main display unit 43 is started based on whether or not the main controller 71 determines whether or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. Based on the fact that when the condition for determining whether or not the main control device 71 is determined is satisfied, the game time is started at a timing before the timing at which the determination is actually made, and the determination is made thereafter. It is good also as a structure by which the subsequent display mode, display continuation time, and stop result in the game time are determined. In this case, the main control device 71 first transmits a variation command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the display duration, and determines the type. The configuration may be such that commands are transmitted, and the transmission timing of these time commands and type commands may be shifted.

  (42) In each of the above embodiments, the main display unit 43 displays a stop result corresponding to each game result. However, instead of this, the main display unit 43 may be omitted, and any game Even if it is a result, it is good also as a structure by which a common stop result is displayed in the main display part 43, and since a stop result is displayed in the main display part 43 at random, from the display of the main display part 43 as a result It is good also as a structure which cannot identify which game result it is.

  (43) On the display screen G, the game result is clearly indicated separately from the symbols that are variably displayed to produce the effects for the game times (specifically, the symbols that are scroll-displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3). It is good also as a structure by which the design (picture) for this is displayed. For example, on the display screen G, an explicit area corresponding to at least one of a narrower area and an edge area than the area where the effect design is displayed is displayed, and at the end of game play in this explicit area It is good also as a structure by which the display corresponding to a game result is made. In this case, the display may be performed by a lighting color pattern in one partition section or a plurality of partition sections, or may be performed by a character or pattern pattern that is difficult to identify.

  The display may be difficult to recognize except for those who are familiar with the correspondence between the display contents and the game results because the display contents are similar between the game results. In this case, while making it difficult for the player to grasp the game result through the display, the game hall manager or the like can grasp the game result through the display. Further, in the above-described explicit area, it may be configured such that a change display or a switching display is performed during the game times, and no display is performed during the game times, but a stop result is displayed when the game times are ended. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  (44) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  For example, based on the winning in the internal lottery, as a big hit state that continues over a plurality of game times until a predetermined plurality of game times or until a predetermined plurality of medals are paid out A first interval in which the winning probability of the payout corresponding role contributing to the payout of medals is higher than in the normal gaming state, and a second interval in which the winning probability is higher than in the normal gaming state but lower than the first state In the configuration having the above, an external output indicating that the jackpot state is performed in the first section and an external output indicating that the jackpot state is not performed in the second section may be omitted.

  Further, in the configuration in which the first jackpot state that continues only in the first section and the second jackpot state that continues only in the second section are set, external output is performed in the first jackpot state. In the second jackpot state, an external output may not be performed.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are started to start rotating a reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the gaming state First transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the gaming state to the gaming state (opening / closing execution mode);
When the end condition is satisfied and the specific game state is ended, second transition means for shifting to a game state different from the game state before the specific game state (when the open / close execution mode ends in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) To execute the migration process)
A recognition means (external terminal board 81) used for recognizing the management means (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine that the game state has been changed;
The control means for recognition (of the main control device 71) sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state where the management means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where the recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As a transition mode when a transition determination result in which transition by both the first transition unit and the second transition unit is performed, a mode during the specific gaming state and a mode of transition after the specific gaming state Multiple types of transition modes are set so that at least one of them is different,
The recognizing control means may be a first transition mode (e.g., a transition mode in the case of an explicit high probability winning result B among the plurality of types of transition modes, or a high frequency support mode). In the case of a transition mode when the result is an unspecified high probability winning result A), the recognizable state is set at a specific timing, while the game mode transition mode is the second of the plurality of types of transition modes. In the case of a transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of low probable hit result A or a transition mode in the case of an unspecified high probable hit result A in the situation of the low frequency support mode) at the specific timing Setting means for maintaining the unrecognizable state without setting the recognizable state (the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 is performed). Game machine characterized by comprising a function) of.

  In the gaming machine of feature A1, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in a gaming hall where a large number of gaming machines are installed. It becomes possible.

  In this case, in the case of the first transition mode, the recognition state is set at a specific timing, while in the case of the second transition mode, the recognition state is maintained at a specific timing. As a result, it is possible to flexibly set the recognizable state between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, and the first transition mode and the second transition mode are set as described above. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily.

  In addition, for example, if the management means recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It becomes possible to restrict this.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game well.

  It should be noted that the “specific timing” includes the start timing of the specific gaming state and the timing when the elapsed time from the start timing of the specific gaming state becomes the specific time, and the specific gaming device operates in the specific gaming state. The configuration includes a case where the predetermined number of operations of the gaming device is started or ended. In addition, in a configuration in which an opening period and an ending period are set in the specific gaming state, the timing during any one of these periods is included.

Feature A2. The first transition mode is a mode in which a specific advantage is advantageous in the specific game state or in the game state thereafter.
The second transition aspect is an aspect in which the specific advantage is disadvantageous,
When the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting means sets the recognizable state at the specific timing before the situation where the specific advantage level is advantageous is started. On the other hand, when the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the game state is maintained in the unrecognizable state without being in the recognizable state at the specific timing. Game machines.

  According to the feature A2, the setting of the recognizable state is not performed uniformly, but is performed flexibly according to the content of the specific advantage degree of the transfer destination. As a result, while the management of a situation where a specific advantage level is advantageous in a game hall or the like can be performed satisfactorily, for example, the execution of the management is caused by the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

Feature A3. The first transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, a transition is made to the first gaming state in which a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous,
The second transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state in which the specific element is relatively disadvantageous,
When the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition aspect, the setting means sets the recognizable state at the specific timing before the transition to the first gaming state is performed, When the game state transition mode is the second transition mode, the game state transition state is maintained in the unrecognizable state without setting the recognizable state at the specific timing. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A3, the setting of the recognizable state is not performed uniformly, but is performed flexibly according to the gaming state after the specific gaming state. As a result, the management of the gaming state after the specific gaming state can be performed satisfactorily in a gaming hall or the like, but the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes, for example, is lost due to the execution of the management. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

  Note that the specific element may be configured to recognize that the element is advantageous from the operation of the gaming machine.

Feature A4. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means is configured to perform the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific entrance portion,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching mode is the high-frequency switching mode as the specific element, while the second gaming state is the switching mode in which the switching mode is the low-frequency switching mode as the specific element. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein the gaming machine is in a gaming state.

  According to the feature A4, by setting the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode, management of the frequency of entering the specific entrance portion in the game hall or illegally opening the specific entrance portion. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor the act to be performed. In addition, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is made different, the player can easily recognize which is the switching mode. Accordingly, in the first transition mode in which the high-frequency switching mode is set after the specific gaming state, the recognition state is set at a specific timing, and in the second transition mode in which the low-frequency switching mode is set after the specific gaming state is recognized at the specific timing. Even if it is discriminated that the setting to the possible state is not performed, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature A5. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively high (a long time mode or a medium time mode) and a mode in which a relatively low mode (a short time mode) is set,
The specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode proceed in the relatively low mode and the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation is the first transition mode and the second mode. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be identified or difficult to identify which of the transition modes is generated from the start timing,
The setting means, when the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition state, is after the low identification section is started and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the timing is set to the recognizable state, when the game state transition mode is the second transition mode, even if the specific timing is reached, the recognizable state is maintained without entering the recognizable state. The gaming machine according to Feature A3 or A4, wherein

  According to the feature A5, since it is difficult to recognize whether a specific element is advantageous or unfavorable after the specific gaming state in the low identification section of the specific gaming state, the player is not able to recognize the specific gaming state in the low identification section. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be advantageous later. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the setting of the recognizable state is not performed until at least halfway timing in the low identification section, for example, the effect of setting the low identification section is lost due to gaming machine management by the management means. There is no. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the gaming machine Difficult to create administrative problems. Furthermore, if the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the first gaming state, so whether the specific element is advantageous. Such management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature A6. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively A high expectation aspect (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set so as to be high and low,
In the specific game state in the first transition mode and the specific game state in the second transition mode, the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed as a section from a start timing to at least an intermediate timing. And a low discrimination section in which it is difficult to identify or difficult to discriminate between the first transition mode and the second transition mode in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitching means. Has been
The setting means, when the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition state, is after the low identification section is started and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the timing is set to the recognizable state, when the game state transition mode is the second transition mode, even if the specific timing is reached, the recognizable state is maintained without entering the recognizable state. The gaming machine according to Feature A3 or A4, wherein

  According to the feature A6, since it is difficult to recognize whether a specific element is advantageous or unfavorable after a specific gaming state in the low identification section of the specific gaming state, the player can not recognize the specific gaming state in the low identification section. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be advantageous later. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the setting of the recognizable state is not performed until at least halfway timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is lost due to the gaming machine management by the management means. Absent. In addition, since the low-identification section is a section in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state has not been set, The problem is hard to occur. Furthermore, if the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the first gaming state, so whether the specific element is advantageous. Such management can be performed satisfactorily.

The specific game state includes a round game that is controlled to be terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches an upper limit number, and further, the round game In a configuration in which a specific game state corresponding to a round game that is terminated based on execution of a predetermined upper limit number of times is set,
In the high expectation mode, the upper limit number of game balls are likely to enter the variable pitching means to be controlled during the variable pitch control according to the mode. Whereas it is an aspect
In the low expectation mode, during the period when the variable pitch control according to the mode is being performed, the upper limit number of game balls have not entered into the variable pitch means that is the control target, or It is good also as a structure which is an aspect which is hard to generate | occur | produce.

  In order to clearly distinguish the ease of entering the game ball from the low expectation mode and the high expectation mode, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of variable entry control is in the open state May be set to a period shorter than the launch period of the game balls. Also, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target for variable entry control is in the open state is a period that is equal to or greater than the launch period of the game balls, and the launch period of the game balls × n (n is greater than the upper limit number) It is good also as a structure set to the following period. Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the n may be any number of “1”, “2”, or “3”.

Feature A7. Producing in the low identification section a low identification effect of an aspect in which it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify whether it is the specific gaming state according to the first transition aspect or the specific gaming state according to the second transition aspect Production control means (a function for executing an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111) to be performed by the execution means (the symbol display device 41);
When the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting means is at the specific timing after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While setting to the recognizable state, when the game state transition mode is the second transition mode, even if the specific timing is reached, the recognizable state is not maintained and the recognizable state is maintained. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein

  According to feature A7, it is difficult to recognize whether a specific element is advantageous or unfavorable after a specific gaming state in a situation where a low discrimination effect is being performed. The game is played while visually recognizing the mode and the low identification effect and expecting an advantageous state after the specific game state. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the setting of the recognizable state is not performed, so that the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the gaming machine management by the management means. Absent. In addition, while the low identification effect is being performed, since the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is a relatively low section, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game It is difficult for problems to occur in the ball management of the machine. Furthermore, when the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. The management of whether or not a particular element is advantageous can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature A8. The setting means sets the state of the recognition means to a first recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state has been performed or a first unrecognizable state in which recognition is impossible. First setting means for
Further, the recognition control means changes the state to the second recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the first gaming state has been performed or the second non-recognizable state in which the recognition is impossible. Any one of features A3 to A7, comprising second setting means for setting the state of the means (function for executing the processing of step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71). The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A8, the management means can distinguish and recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state and the transition to the first gaming state are performed. It is possible to manage whether or not it is in a state, and it is possible to manage whether or not the transition to the first gaming state has been performed without triggering the end of the specific gaming state Become.

  In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, the first recognizable state is not set in any transition mode. 2 When it is set to a recognizable state, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, the configuration of the feature A3 is provided, and when the transition to the first gaming state after the specific gaming state is made, the first recognizable state is set in advance so that the management can be performed satisfactorily. Can be.

Feature A9. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means determines that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion, and performs the determination based on the condition. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The first transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from a mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the high-frequency switching mode is set. And
The second transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the low-frequency switching mode is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein:

  While the type of transition judgment mode can be made indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate in the appearance of the gaming machine, the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is changed. It is difficult to recognize which mode it is. Under such circumstances, in the feature A9, the setting to the recognizable state is not performed in relation to the transition determination mode, and the setting to the recognizable state is performed in relation to the switching mode. This allows the player to predict which transition determination mode is after the specific gaming state, so as not to lose the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game, while entering the specific pitching part in the gaming hall. It is possible to satisfactorily perform the management of the ball frequency and the monitoring of the act of illegally opening the specific entrance part.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

  Feature A10. The first transition mode and the second transition mode are both transition modes that are performed with the same transition determination result (for example, the non-explicit high probability winning result A) as a trigger, while the first transition mode is a predetermined one. The transition mode is based on the same transition determination result in the gaming state, and the second transition mode is based on the same transition determination result in a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, which is a transition mode performed.

  According to the feature A10, even if it is the same transition determination result, the transition state of the subsequent game state is different, and it is possible to diversify the game without increasing the types of transition determination results. Even in this case, the recognizable state is set in a flexible manner according to the transition mode, instead of setting the recognizable state in a uniform manner according to the transition determination result. Thereby, the gaming machine management through the setting of the recognizable state can be performed without losing the above effect.

Feature A11. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively high (a long time mode or a medium time mode) and a mode in which a relatively low mode (a short time mode) is set,
As a determination result of the transition determination means, the transition to the specific gaming state in the relatively low mode occurs, but when the specific gaming state ends, the same game state as the gaming state before the specific gaming state The partial transition result (special outage result) that returns to the state is set,
The recognizing control means maintains the unrecognizable state without making the recognizable state when the game state transition occurs based on the partial transition result.
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the mode in the specific gaming state based on the fact that the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation from the start timing of the specific gaming state to at least halfway timing is the partial transition result. Or it is configured to produce a low discrimination section that is difficult to identify,
When the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until a predetermined timing after the low identification section is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10.

  According to feature A11, by setting the partial transition result, the specific gaming state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the privilege for the player and suppressing the influence on the transition rate of the gaming state excluding the specific gaming state. It is possible to use the transition to as an effect. Also, in the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, the specific gaming state based on the partial transition result is configured to generate a low identification section that cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. A game is played while predicting whether a game state transition will occur. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the recognizable state is not set until at least halfway in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section by the management of the gaming machine by the management means is not lost. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the gaming machine Difficult to create administrative problems.

Feature A12. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively A high expectation aspect (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set so as to be high and low,
Furthermore, as a determination result of the transition determination means, a transition to the specific gaming state that ends after the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed a specific number of times occurs, but the specific gaming state has ended. In this case, a partial transition result (special outage result) for returning to the same gaming state as the gaming state before the specific gaming state is set,
The recognizing control means maintains the unrecognizable state without making the recognizable state when the game state transition occurs based on the partial transition result.
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the specific gaming state mode based on the fact that the operation mode of the variable pitching means from the start timing of the specific gaming state to at least halfway timing is the partial transition result or It is configured to produce a low discrimination section that is difficult to identify,
When the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until a predetermined timing after the low identification section is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10.

  According to the feature A12, the partial game result is set, so that the influence on the grant rate for the player is suppressed and the influence on the game state transfer rate excluding the specific game state is suppressed, while the specific game state It is possible to use the transition to as an effect. Also, in the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, the specific gaming state based on the partial transition result is configured to generate a low identification section that cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. A game is played while predicting whether a game state transition will occur. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the setting of the recognizable state is not performed until at least halfway timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is lost due to the gaming machine management by the management means. Absent. In addition, since the low-identification section is a section in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state has not been set, The problem is hard to occur.

Feature A13. Performing a low-identification effect in the low-identification section in a state where it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify whether it is the specific game state according to the partial transition result or the specific game state according to the second transition mode Means control means (design display device 41) to be performed by the means (design display device 41) (display control device 111 and function for executing the effect determination processing for the opening and closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72),
The setting means maintains the non-recognizable state until at least the low identification effect ends when the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode. Game machines.

  According to the feature A13, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the management of the gaming machine by the management means. There is no end to it. In addition, while the low identification effect is being performed, since the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is a relatively low section, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game It is difficult for problems to occur in the ball management of the machine.

Feature A14. A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means determines that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion, and performs the determination based on the condition. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The second transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the low-frequency switching mode is set. And
The setting means does not perform setting to the recognizable state triggered by the transition of the gaming state when the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode. Or the game machine as described in A13.

  While the type of transition judgment mode can be made indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate in the appearance of the gaming machine, the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is changed. It is difficult to recognize which mode it is. Under such circumstances, in the feature A14, the transition determination mode is changed across the specific game state, but in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the low-frequency switching mode, the recognizable state is triggered by that. Setting is not performed. Thereby, when a specific gaming state having a low identification section occurs, it is possible to continue the player's sense of expectation not only in the low identification section but also after the specific gaming state.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature A15. A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific entrance portion (function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
With
The transition determination means determines that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion, and performs the determination based on the condition. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
In the second transition mode, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from a mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the high-frequency switching mode is set. And
In the case where the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means is a timing after the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed after the low identification section is started. The game machine according to Feature A12 or A13, wherein the game machine is set to the recognizable state.

  While the type of transition judgment mode can be made indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate in the appearance of the gaming machine, the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is changed. It is difficult to recognize which mode it is. Under such circumstances, in the feature A15, the transition determination mode is changed across the specific gaming state, and in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the high-frequency switching mode, the game state after the specific gaming state is changed to the gaming state. It is set to a recognizable state at the timing before the transition is performed. This makes it possible to play a game while expecting an advantageous state after a specific game state in a low identification section, and also manages the frequency of entering a specific ball in the game hall and specifies it illegally. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor the act of trying to open the ball-entry unit.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature A16. The first transition mode is a mode in which a degree of expectation that a predetermined privilege is granted during the specific gaming state is relatively high,
The second transition mode is a mode in which the degree of expectation that the predetermined privilege is granted during the specific gaming state is relatively low,
When the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting means sets the recognition state to the recognizable state at the specific timing before the start of the situation in which the predetermined privilege can be granted. On the other hand, when the game state transition mode is the second transition mode, the game state is maintained in the unrecognizable state without being in the recognizable state at the specific timing. The gaming machine according to any one of A15.

  According to the feature A16, the setting of the recognizable state is not performed uniformly, but is flexibly performed in relation to a situation in which a predetermined privilege can be given in the specific gaming state. As a result, benefits can be managed well in game halls, etc., but the effects of setting multiple types of transition modes will not be lost due to the execution of such management. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature A17. Based on the fact that the recognition means is in the recognizable state, the management means performs a predetermined notification on display means (data counter DC) provided corresponding to the gaming machine in the game hall. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A17, when the predetermined notification is performed in the game hall, the excellent effect as described above can be obtained.

Feature A18. A game turning operation is started based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game turning operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means based on the establishment of the condition. Game time control for controlling predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition as one game time. Means (function for executing the processing of steps S1001 to S1011 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111);
Effect control means for specific game state that performs an effect for the specific game state in the situation where the specific game state is being executed (function and display for executing the processing of steps S1012 to S1013 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) Control device 111);
With
The gaming time control means may be configured as the notification result in which the transition destination mode cannot be identified regardless of whether the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode or the second transition mode. An ending means (a function for executing the process of step S1008 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) for ending the game turning operation;
The effect control means for the specific gaming state is at least halfway from the start timing regardless of whether the gaming state transition mode is the first transition mode or the second transition mode. It is characterized by having means (function to execute the processing of steps S1101 to S1110 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) that makes it possible to produce an effect that the transition destination mode cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A17.

  According to the feature A18, the player grasps whether the game state transition mode is the first transition mode or the second transition mode from the notification result of the game turning operation or the effect mode for the specific game state. difficult. This increases the possibility of playing a game in the specific game state while expecting that it will be desirable for the player in the first transition mode and the second transition mode, and improves the degree of attention to the specific game state Is planned.

Feature A19. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the gaming state First transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the gaming state to the gaming state (opening / closing execution mode);
When the end condition is satisfied and the specific game state is ended, second transition means for shifting to a game state different from the game state before the specific game state (when the open / close execution mode ends in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) To execute the migration process)
Recognizing means (external terminal board 81) used for recognizing the specific means (hall computer HC) that the game state has been changed;
Recognizing control means for setting the state of the recognizing means to a recognizable state where the identifying means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where the recognizing is impossible (of the main control device 71) A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As a transition mode when a transition determination result in which transition by both the first transition unit and the second transition unit is performed, a mode during the specific gaming state and a mode of transition after the specific gaming state Multiple types of transition modes are set so that at least one of them is different,
The recognizing control means may be a first transition mode (e.g., a transition mode in the case of an explicit high probability winning result B among the plurality of types of transition modes, or a high frequency support mode). In the case of a transition mode when the result is an unspecified high probability winning result A), the recognizable state is set at a specific timing, while the game mode transition mode is the second of the plurality of types of transition modes. In the case of a transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of low probable hit result A or a transition mode in the case of an unspecified high probable hit result A in the situation of the low frequency support mode) at the specific timing Setting means for maintaining the unrecognizable state without setting the recognizable state (the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 is performed). Game machine characterized by comprising a function) of.

  In the gaming machine having the feature A19, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed satisfactorily.

  In this case, in the case of the first transition mode, the recognition state is set at a specific timing, while in the case of the second transition mode, the recognition state is maintained at a specific timing. As a result, it is possible to flexibly set the recognizable state between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, and the first transition mode and the second transition mode are set as described above. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily.

  In addition, for example, if the specifying means recognizes that the game state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It becomes possible to restrict this.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game well.

  It should be noted that the “specific timing” includes the start timing of the specific gaming state and the timing when the elapsed time from the start timing of the specific gaming state becomes the specific time, and the specific gaming device operates in the specific gaming state. The configuration includes a case where the predetermined number of operations of the gaming device is started or ended. In addition, in a configuration in which an opening period and an ending period are set in the specific gaming state, the timing during any one of these periods is included.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means (in the first embodiment, the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, the third terminal used for making the management means (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine recognize that the game state transition has been performed. In the embodiment, the second external terminal 81b),
Recognizing control means for setting the state of the recognizing means to a recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a recognizable state in which the recognizing is impossible (first embodiment) Is a function for executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and a function for executing the processing of step S413, step S2206 and step S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment. )When,
With
As a transition mode when the determination result is that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed, in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege proceeds in a relatively low mode and a relatively high mode A specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of an explicit high probability hit result B) having the second section to be advanced is set,
The recognizing control means is configured to change the game state transition state so that the recognition state is not allowed in at least part of the first section and the recognition state is in at least part of the second section. The setting means for switching the setting of the recognition means in the case of the transition mode (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, in the third embodiment A gaming machine having a function of executing the processing of step S2206 and step S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71.

  In the gaming machine of feature B1, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in a gaming hall where a large number of gaming machines are installed. It becomes possible. In addition, by setting a specific transition mode in which the first section and the second section are generated as the transition state of the gaming state, the execution of the specific gaming state is produced while suppressing the influence on the predetermined privilege grant rate. It can be used as a game, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, it is not set to the recognizable state uniformly regardless of whether it is the first section or the second section, but the recognizable state and the unrecognizable state according to the staying section. The setting of the recognition means is switched between. Thereby, when the transition state of the gaming state becomes a specific transition mode, the recognizable state is set flexibly, and the gaming machine management is performed well in the configuration in which the specific transition mode is set. Is possible.

Feature B2. The specific transition mode is a mode in which, as the specific gaming state, the transition to the switching-specific specific gaming state having the first section and the second section,
The setting means is in the specific game state corresponding to the switching so that the recognition state is not allowed in at least part of the first section and the recognition state is in at least part of the second section. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the setting of the means for recognition is switched.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the specific gaming state by setting the switching-specific specific gaming state as the specific gaming state. In addition, in the specific game state corresponding to the switching, gaming machine management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B3. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively A high expectation aspect (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set so as to be high and low,
The first zone is a zone where the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed, and the second zone is a zone where the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode is performed. A gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to perform an effect through the operation of the variable pitching means in the first section, and it is possible to give a privilege through the operation of the variable pitching means in the second section. Thereby, diversification of the game in a specific game state is achieved using the variable pitching means. In this case, with the configuration of the feature B2, the recognizable state can be flexibly set depending on whether the operation of the variable pitching means is used as an effect or for the purpose of giving a privilege. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state, it becomes possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily. Further, for example, in the first section where the presentation is performed through the operation of the variable pitching means, emphasis is placed on improving the degree of attention of the game, and in the second section where the frequency of giving a privilege to the player is improved, the gaming machine management Can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B4. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means (conditional jackpot external terminal 81c) used for recognizing the management means (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine that the game state has been transferred;
The control means for recognition (of the main control device 71) sets the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state where the management means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a recognition impossible state where the recognition is impossible. The function of executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92);
With
As a transition mode in the case where the determination result of the transition to the specific game state is obtained, there are a plurality of types so that at least one of the mode in the specific game state and the mode of transition after the specific game state is different Transition mode is set,
When the transition mode of the gaming state is a specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the result is an explicit high probability winning result B), the recognition control means is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. Compared with the case where the result is an explicit high probability winning result (for example, the transition mode when the result is the recognizable state), setting means for delaying the timing for setting to the recognizable state (the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71) A gaming machine characterized by having a function to be executed).

  In the gaming machine of feature B4, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in a gaming hall where a large number of gaming machines are installed. It becomes possible.

  In this case, when the game mode transition mode is a specific transition mode, the timing for setting the recognizable state is delayed compared to the case where the game mode transition mode is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to flexibly set the recognizable state depending on whether it is a specific transition mode or a predetermined transition mode, and in a configuration in which a plurality of types of transition modes are set as described above, It will be possible to manage the gaming machine well.

  In addition, for example, if the management means recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It becomes possible to restrict this. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is not set at all but delayed, it is still possible to manage gaming machines.

Feature B5. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means (in the first embodiment, the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, the third terminal used for making the management means (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine recognize that the game state transition has been performed. In the embodiment, the second external terminal 81b),
Recognizing control means for setting the state of the recognizing means to a recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a recognizable state in which the recognizing is impossible (first embodiment) Is a function for executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and a function for executing the processing of step S413, step S2206 and step S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment. )When,
With
As an aspect of the specific gaming state, an aspect with a relatively high expectation of granting a predetermined privilege (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a relatively low aspect (short-time aspect) are set. ,
The state transition means, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result (for example, the explicit high probability winning result B), the section that proceeds in the relatively low mode is at least from the start timing. A transition is made to the first specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B) that occurs over the middle of the timing,
When the control unit for recognition is shifted to the first specific gaming state, setting means for delaying the timing for setting to the recognizable state until after the intermediate timing of the section (in the first embodiment, the main control device 71). The MPU 92 has a function of executing the processes of steps S511 and S512, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2206 and S2208 of the MPU 92 of the main controller 71). Machine.

  In the gaming machine of feature B5, when the game state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in a gaming hall where a large number of gaming machines are installed. It becomes possible. In addition, the provision of the predetermined privilege is provided by setting the first specific gaming state in which the section that progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of the provision of the predetermined privilege is relatively low is generated at least halfway from the start timing. Execution of a specific gaming state can be used as an effect while suppressing the influence on the rate, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing. Thereby, when it will transfer to the 1st specific game state, the setting of a recognizable state will be performed flexibly according to the progress situation, and the 1st specific game state was set as a specific game state Therefore, it is possible to manage the gaming machine satisfactorily.

  In addition, for example, if the management means recognizes that the game state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of specific game state may be lost. Can be restricted.

Feature B6. As a transition mode of the gaming state triggered by the first determination result, after the first segment progressing in the relatively low mode, the second segment in which the game content related to the grant of privilege is changed is The specific aspect that occurs is set,
The setting means sets the recognizable state after timing in the middle of the first section and before the end of the second section when the game state transition mode is the specific mode. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein

  According to the feature B6, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the game content related to the provision of the privilege, and the first section is the transition state of the game state triggered by the first determination result. In the configuration in which the second section and the second section are set, gaming machine management can be performed satisfactorily. Further, for example, even if the recognizable state is not set, it is difficult to cause a problem in gaming machine management. In the first section, emphasis is placed on improving the degree of attention of the game. Can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B7. The first specific gaming state is configured such that a second section that proceeds in the relatively high mode is generated after the first section that continues in the relatively low mode.
When the setting means shifts to the first specific gaming state, the setting means sets the recognizable state after the timing in the middle of the first section and before the end of the second section. A gaming machine according to Feature B5 or B6, characterized by

  According to the feature B7, the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state by flexibly setting the recognizable state depending on whether the expected degree of granting the predetermined privilege is high. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily. Further, for example, even if the recognizable state is not set, in the first section in which a problem in gaming machine management is not likely to occur, emphasis is placed on improving the attention level of the game, and the expected degree of granting a predetermined privilege is relative When a second section that is extremely high is generated, gaming machine management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B8. The state transition means shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. Based on the fact that (for example, the explicit high probability winning result A or the special outage result) is obtained, the second specific gaming state (for example, the pattern A of the pattern A) in which the relatively low aspect continues at least halfway from the start timing. Open / close execution mode)
The first specific game state and the second specific game state proceed in the relatively low mode, and the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation is any of the first specific game state and the second specific game state. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be identified or difficult to identify is generated from the start timing,
When the setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until a specific timing after the low identification section is started and shifts to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature B6 or B7, which is set to the recognizable state after the specific timing and before the end of the second section.

  According to the feature B8, the game is performed while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the recognizable state is not set at least until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the gaming machine management by the management means. . In addition, the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is low, so even if the recognizable state is not set, there is a problem in gaming machine management. Is difficult to occur. Furthermore, in the case of becoming the second section, the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, so that it is possible to manage well whether or not the second section is reached. .

  Feature B9. When the setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until the low identification interval elapses, and when the setting means shifts to the first specific gaming state, the low identification interval The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein the gaming machine is set to the recognizable state thereafter and before the start timing of the second section.

  According to the feature B9, the effect of setting the low identification section over the entire low identification section can be prevented from being lost due to gaming machine management by the management means. This can be recognized by the management means at the timing when the section is started.

Feature B10. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively A high expectation aspect (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set so as to be high and low,
The first zone is a zone where the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed, and the second zone is a zone where the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B9.

  According to the feature B10, it is possible to perform an effect through the operation of the variable pitching means in the first section, and it is possible to give a privilege through the operation of the variable pitching means in the second section. Thereby, diversification of the game in a specific game state is achieved using the variable pitching means. In this case, the recognizable state is set depending on whether the operation of the variable pitching means is used as an effect or is used for the purpose of giving a privilege by having the configuration such as the features B3 and B4. By being performed flexibly, gaming machine management can be performed satisfactorily in a configuration in which the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state. Further, for example, in the first section where the presentation is performed through the operation of the variable pitching means, emphasis is placed on improving the degree of attention of the game, and in the second section where the frequency of giving a privilege to the player is improved, the gaming machine management Can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B11. The state transition means shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. The second specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A) in which the relatively low mode continues for at least halfway from the start timing based on (for example, the explicit high probability winning result A). To be transferred to
The first specific game state and the second specific game state proceed by performing the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode, and the first specific game state in terms of the operation of the variable pitch means. It is configured such that a low identification section is generated from a start timing when it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify which state is related to the state and the second specific gaming state,
When the setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until the specific timing after the low identification section is started, and shifts to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature B10, wherein the game machine is set to the recognizable state after the specific timing and before the end of the second section.

  According to the feature B11, a game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the recognizable state is not set until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to gaming machine management by the management means. In addition, since the low-identification section is a section in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state has not been set, The problem is hard to occur. Furthermore, in the case of becoming the second section, the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, so that it is possible to manage well whether or not the second section is reached. .

  Feature B12. When the setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until the low identification interval elapses, and when the setting means shifts to the first specific gaming state, the low identification interval The gaming machine according to Feature B11, which is set to the recognizable state thereafter and before the start timing of the second section.

  According to the feature B12, the effect of setting the low identification section over the entire low identification section can be prevented from being lost due to gaming machine management by the management means. This can be recognized by the management means at the timing when the section is started.

Feature B13. In the low identification section, the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) performs a low identification effect in such a manner that it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify whether it is the first specific game state or the second specific game state. Effect control means (a function for executing the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111) to be performed;
The setting means maintains the non-recognizable state at least until the low identification effect is finished when transitioning to the second specific gaming state, and the low identification effect when transitioning to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature B11 or B12, which is set to the recognizable state after the end of the time period and before the end of the second section.

  According to the feature B13, it is possible to further enhance the effect of setting the low identification section by performing the low identification effect in the low identification section. In this case, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the management of the gaming machine by the management means. There is nothing. In addition, while the low identification effect is being performed, since the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is a relatively low section, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game It is difficult for problems to occur in the ball management of the machine. Furthermore, in the case of becoming the second section, the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, so that it is possible to manage well whether or not the second section is reached. .

Feature B14. As a gaming state to be transferred after the specific gaming state, a case where a specific element (support mode) for changing the advantage degree is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous is set.
As a transition state of the game state including the transition to the second specific game state, a predetermined transition mode is set in which the specific element shifts to the advantageous game state after the second specific game state. ,
The setting means is configured to set the recognizable state before the start timing of the gaming state in which the specific element is advantageous when the predetermined transition mode is achieved. B8, B9, The gaming machine according to any one of B11 to B13.

  According to the feature B14, in the low identification section, the game is performed while predicting whether the second section will occur thereafter or the gaming state in which the specific element is advantageous, and attention to the game It becomes possible to increase the degree. In addition, when a specific element is advantageous after the second specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the gaming state is performed, so whether or not the specific element is advantageous. Such management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B15. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means is configured to perform the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific entrance portion,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
As a transition state of the gaming state including transition to the second specific gaming state, a predetermined transition mode for transitioning to the gaming state that becomes the high-frequency switching mode after the second specific gaming state is set,
The setting means sets the recognizable state before the start timing of the gaming state to be the high-frequency switching mode when the predetermined transition mode is set. B8, B9, B11 to B13 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B15, in the low identification section, the game is performed while predicting whether the second section will occur thereafter or the gaming state in the high-frequency switching mode will occur, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. It becomes possible. In addition, when the game state is changed to the high-frequency switching mode after the second specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the gaming state is performed. It becomes possible to manage well whether or not.

  In particular, by setting the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode, management of the frequency of entering the specific entrance part in the game hall and monitoring the act of attempting to open the specific entrance part illegally Etc. can be performed satisfactorily. In addition, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is made different, it is easy for the player to recognize which is the switching mode. Therefore, when the game mode is changed to the high-frequency switching mode. Even if the recognizable state is set, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature B16. The setting means sets the state of the recognition means to a first recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state has been performed or a first unrecognizable state in which recognition is impossible. First setting means for
Further, the recognizing control means is a second recognizable state or a non-recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the gaming state to be the high-frequency switching mode has been performed. A feature B15 is characterized by further comprising second setting means for setting the state of the recognition means (a function for executing the processing of steps S516, S905, and S915 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71). Game machines.

  According to the feature B16, the management means can distinguish and recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed and the transition to the gaming state that is the high-frequency switching mode. Therefore, it is possible to manage whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state, and manage whether or not the transition to the high-frequency switching mode has been performed without triggering the end of the specific gaming state. It becomes possible.

  In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the first recognizable state is not set in any specific gaming state. Then, when it is set to the second recognizable state, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, the configuration of the feature B15 is provided, and after the second specific gaming state, when the game state is changed to the high-frequency switching mode, the first recognizable state is set in advance. Therefore, the above management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B17. The second specific gaming state is set so that the mode after the low identification section is different from the case of the first specific gaming state,
The setting means sets the recognizable state when the same delay period has elapsed in both the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. , B9, and the gaming machine according to any one of B11 to B16.

  According to the feature B17, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the processing related to the setting of the delay period.

Feature B18. The second determination result is that the transition to the second specific gaming state according to the relatively low aspect occurs, but the gaming state before the second specific gaming state when the second specific gaming state ends. Is a determination result that will return to the same gaming state,
The recognition control means does not perform the setting to the recognizable state triggered by the transition of the gaming state when the second determination result is obtained. B8, B9, B11 A gaming machine according to any one of B13.

  According to the feature B18, the recognizable state can be set flexibly in accordance with the game state transition mode.

Feature B19. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means used for recognizing the specific means (hall computer HC) that the game state has been changed (the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the first embodiment, and the first in the third embodiment. 2 external terminals 81b),
Recognizing control means (first embodiment) for setting the state of the recognizing means to a recognizable state where the identifying means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where recognizable is impossible. Is a function for executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and a function for executing the processing of step S413, step S2206 and step S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment. )When,
With
As a transition mode when the determination result is that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed, in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege proceeds in a relatively low mode and a relatively high mode A specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of an explicit high probability hit result B) having the second section to be advanced is set,
The recognizing control means is configured to change the game state transition state so that the recognition state is not allowed in at least part of the first section and the recognition state is in at least part of the second section. The setting means for switching the setting of the recognition means in the case of the transition mode (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, in the third embodiment A gaming machine having a function of executing the processing of step S2206 and step S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71.

  In the gaming machine of feature B19, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well. In addition, by setting a specific transition mode in which the first section and the second section are generated as the transition state of the gaming state, the execution of the specific gaming state is produced while suppressing the influence on the predetermined privilege grant rate. It can be used as a game, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, it is not set to the recognizable state uniformly regardless of whether it is the first section or the second section, but the recognizable state and the unrecognizable state according to the staying section. The setting of the recognition means is switched between. Thereby, when the transition state of the gaming state becomes a specific transition mode, the recognizable state is set flexibly, and the gaming machine management is performed well in the configuration in which the specific transition mode is set. Is possible.

Feature B20. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
A means for recognition (external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot) used to make the specific means (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state transition has been performed;
Recognizing control means for setting the state of the recognizing means to a recognizable state where the identifying means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where the recognizing is impossible (of the main control device 71) The function of executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92);
With
As a transition mode in the case where the determination result of the transition to the specific game state is obtained, there are a plurality of types so that at least one of the mode in the specific game state and the mode of transition after the specific game state is different Transition mode is set,
When the transition mode of the gaming state is a specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the result is an explicit high probability winning result B), the recognition control means is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. Compared with the case where the result is an explicit high probability winning result (for example, the transition mode when the result is the recognizable state), setting means for delaying the timing for setting to the recognizable state (the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71) A gaming machine characterized by having a function to be executed).

  In the gaming machine of feature B20, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed satisfactorily.

  In this case, when the game mode transition mode is a specific transition mode, the timing for setting the recognizable state is delayed compared to the case where the game mode transition mode is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to flexibly set the recognizable state depending on whether it is a specific transition mode or a predetermined transition mode, and in a configuration in which a plurality of types of transition modes are set as described above, It will be possible to manage the gaming machine well.

  In addition, for example, if the specifying means recognizes that the game state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It becomes possible to restrict this. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is not set at all but delayed, it is still possible to manage gaming machines.

Feature B21. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means used for recognizing the specific means (hall computer HC) that the game state has been changed (the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the first embodiment, and the first in the third embodiment. 2 external terminals 81b),
Recognizing control means (first embodiment) for setting the state of the recognizing means to a recognizable state where the identifying means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where recognizable is impossible. Is a function for executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and a function for executing the processing of step S413, step S2206 and step S2208 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 in the third embodiment. )When,
With
As an aspect of the specific gaming state, an aspect with a relatively high expectation of granting a predetermined privilege (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a relatively low aspect (short-time aspect) are set. ,
The state transition means, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result (for example, the explicit high probability winning result B), the section that proceeds in the relatively low mode is at least from the start timing. A transition is made to the first specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B) that occurs over the middle of the timing,
When the control unit for recognition is shifted to the first specific gaming state, setting means for delaying the timing for setting to the recognizable state until after the intermediate timing of the section (in the first embodiment, the main control device 71). The MPU 92 has a function of executing the processes of steps S511 and S512, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2206 and S2208 of the MPU 92 of the main controller 71). Machine.

  In the gaming machine of feature B21, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed satisfactorily. In addition, the provision of the predetermined privilege is provided by setting the first specific gaming state in which the section that progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of the provision of the predetermined privilege is relatively low is generated at least halfway from the start timing. Execution of a specific gaming state can be used as an effect while suppressing the influence on the rate, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing. Thereby, when it will transfer to the 1st specific game state, the setting of a recognizable state will be performed flexibly according to the progress situation, and the 1st specific game state was set as a specific game state Therefore, it is possible to manage the gaming machine satisfactorily.

  Also, for example, if the specific means recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting multiple types of specific gaming state may be lost, etc. Can be restricted.

  By applying the configuration limited to any one of the features A1 to A19 and the configuration limited to any one of the features C1 to C12 to any one of the features B1 to B21, A synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means (in the first embodiment, the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, the third terminal used for making the management means (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine recognize that the game state transition has been performed. In the embodiment, a third external terminal 81c),
Recognizing control means for setting the state of the recognizing means to a recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a recognizable state in which the recognizing is impossible (first embodiment) In the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 a function of executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512, in the third embodiment a function of executing the processing of step S413 and step S2119 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
With
As a gaming state to be transferred after the specific gaming state, a case where a specific element (support mode) for changing an advantage degree is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous are set.
As a transition state of the gaming state including transition to the specific gaming state, a first transition mode in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state (e.g., explicit high likelihood winning result A) And the transition mode when the non-explicit high probability hit result A is set in the high frequency support mode)
When the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the recognition control means is after the timing in the middle of the specific gaming state and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. Setting means for setting to the recognizable state at the timing (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71, in the third embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 in the third embodiment). A game machine having a function of executing the process of step S2119.

  In the gaming machine of feature C1, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in a gaming hall where a large number of gaming machines are installed. It becomes possible. In addition, as a transition mode of the game state, the first transition mode in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific game state is set, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, when the game state transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing of the specific gaming state. Thereby, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes the first transition mode, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first transition mode is set as the gaming state transition mode. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily.

  In addition, for example, if the management means recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting multiple types of gaming state transitions may be lost. Can be restricted.

Feature C2. The setting means sets the state of the recognition means to a first recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state has been performed or a first unrecognizable state in which recognition is impossible. First setting means for
Further, the control means for recognition makes a second recognizable state or a non-recognizable second state in which the management means can recognize that the transition to the gaming state in which the specific element is advantageous is performed. A second setting unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S516, S905, and S915 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) is provided to set the state of the recognition unit in a recognition disabled state. A gaming machine according to C1.

  According to the feature C2, the management means recognizes that the transition to the specific gaming state has been performed and the transition to the gaming state in which the specific element is advantageous. Because it is possible, it is possible to manage whether or not it is in a specific gaming state, and whether or not a specific element has become advantageous without triggering the end of the specific gaming state Can be performed.

  In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to identify that the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the first recognition is possible even if the game state transition occurs according to the first transition mode. If the state is not set, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific gaming state when the second recognizable state is set. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and the transition to the gaming state in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state, the first recognizable state is set in advance. The above management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature C3. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively high (a long-time mode or a medium-time mode), and a relatively low mode (a short-time mode) is set.
The specific game state in the first transition mode is configured to proceed in the relatively low mode without the relatively high mode being performed, according to the feature C1 or C2 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C3, even if the setting of the recognizable state is delayed during the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state proceeds in a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting the predetermined privilege is relatively low. Problems are difficult to occur.

Feature C4. As an aspect of the specific gaming state, an aspect with a relatively high expectation of granting a predetermined privilege (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a relatively high aspect (short-time aspect) are set. ,
As a transition state of the gaming state including transition to the specific gaming state, a second transition mode different from the first transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of a special outage result or a low-frequency support mode that is not The transition mode when the jackpot result is A) is set,
The specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode proceed in the relatively low mode and the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation is the first transition mode and the second mode. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be identified or difficult to identify which of the transition modes is generated from the start timing,
When the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a specific timing after the low identification section is started, and the transition of the gaming state When the mode is the first transition mode, the recognizable state is set at a timing after the specific timing and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

  According to the feature C4, a game is performed while predicting which of the first transition mode and the second transition mode is in the low identification section. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the recognizable state is not set until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to gaming machine management by the management means. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the gaming machine Difficult to create administrative problems. Furthermore, since it is set to a recognizable state at the timing before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state, it is possible to manage well whether or not the specific element is advantageous. It becomes.

Feature C5. The second transition mode is a transition mode in which the relatively high mode does not occur during the specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state proceeds in the relatively low mode, and after the specific gaming state In which the specific element is disadvantageous,
The setting means does not perform the setting to the recognizable state triggered by the transition state of the gaming state when the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode. A gaming machine according to C4.

  In order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, a configuration in which the recognizable state is set in the second transition mode as in the first transition mode is also considered. However, in this case, the management means cannot distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode. On the other hand, according to the feature C5, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while eliminating such inconvenience.

  Further, in the second transition mode, the specific gaming state proceeds in a mode in which the expected degree of granting the predetermined privilege is relatively low. Therefore, even if the setting to the recognizable state is not performed in the second transition mode, the game Difficult to cause problems in machine management.

Feature C6. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively A high expectation aspect (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set so as to be high and low,
Furthermore, a second transition mode different from the first transition mode is set as a transition mode of the game state including the transition to the specific gaming state,
The specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode proceed by performing the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode, and the operation of the variable pitching means. It is configured such that a low identification interval is generated from the start timing when it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify which of the first transition aspect and the second transition aspect in appearance.
When the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until a specific timing after the low identification section is started, and the transition of the gaming state When the mode is the first transition mode, the recognizable state is set at a timing after the specific timing and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

  According to the feature C6, a game is performed while predicting which of the first transition mode and the second transition mode is in the low identification section. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the recognizable state is not set until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to gaming machine management by the management means. In addition, since the low-identification section is a section in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state has not been set, The problem is hard to occur. Furthermore, since it is set to a recognizable state at the timing before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state, it is possible to manage well whether or not the specific element is advantageous. It becomes.

Feature C7. An effect execution means (symbol display device) in the low identification section for a low identification effect of an aspect that is visually unidentifiable or difficult to discern whether it is related to the first transition aspect or the second transition aspect 41) is provided with effect control means (function for executing effect determination processing for the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111),
When the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the low identification effect ends, and the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode. In the transition mode, it is set to the recognizable state at a timing after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state. A gaming machine according to C6.

  According to the feature C7, the effect of setting the low identification section can be further enhanced by performing the low identification effect in the low identification section. In this case, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the management of the gaming machine by the management means. There is nothing. In addition, while the low identification effect is being performed, since the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is a relatively low section, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game It is difficult for problems to occur in the ball management of the machine. Furthermore, since it is set to a recognizable state at the timing before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state, it is possible to manage well whether or not the specific element is advantageous. It becomes.

Feature C8. The second transition mode is a transition mode in which the specific gaming state ends after the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed a specific number of times, and the specific element is disadvantageous after the specific gaming state. Is a transition aspect that becomes
The setting means does not perform the setting to the recognizable state triggered by the transition state of the gaming state when the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode. A gaming machine according to C6 or C7.

  In order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, a configuration in which the recognizable state is set in the second transition mode as in the first transition mode is also considered. However, in this case, the management means cannot distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode. On the other hand, according to the feature C8, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above while eliminating such inconvenience.

  In addition, the specific game state in the second transition mode has a relatively low expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, so even if the recognizable state is not set in the second transition mode. It is difficult for management problems to occur.

Feature C9. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means determines that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion, and performs the determination based on the condition. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The first transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from a mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the high-frequency switching mode is set. And
The second transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, and the switching mode is the gaming state in which the low frequency switching mode is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C8, wherein:

  While the type of transition judgment mode can be made indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate in the appearance of the gaming machine, the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is changed. It is difficult to recognize which mode it is. Under such circumstances, in the feature C9, the setting to the recognizable state is not performed in relation to the transition determination mode, and the setting to the recognizable state is performed in relation to the switching mode. This allows the player to predict which transition determination mode is after the specific gaming state, so as not to lose the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game, while entering the specific pitching part in the gaming hall. It is possible to satisfactorily perform the management of the ball frequency and the monitoring of the act of illegally opening the specific entrance part.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

  Feature C10. Both the first transition mode and the second transition mode are transition modes that are performed with the same determination result (for example, the non-explicit high probability winning result A) as an opportunity, while the first transition mode is a predetermined game. A transition mode performed based on the same determination result in the state, and the second transition mode is a transition performed based on the same determination result in a game state different from the predetermined game state The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C9, which is an aspect.

  According to the feature C10, even if it is the same transition determination result, the transition mode of the subsequent game state is different, and it is possible to diversify the game without increasing the type of transition determination result. Even in this case, the recognizable state is set in a flexible manner according to the transition mode, instead of setting the recognizable state in a uniform manner according to the transition determination result. Thereby, the gaming machine management through the setting of the recognizable state can be performed without losing the above effect.

Feature C11. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means is configured to perform the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific entrance portion,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The first transition mode is a transition mode in which the switching mode becomes the high-frequency switching mode as the specific element after the specific gaming state, according to any one of the features C1 to C10, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C11, by setting the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode, management of the frequency of entering the specific pitching portion in the game hall or illegally opening the specific pitching portion. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor the act to be performed. In addition, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is made different, the player can easily recognize which is the switching mode. Therefore, even if the setting to the recognizable state is performed, the effect due to the setting of a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature C12. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means used for recognizing the specific means (hall computer HC) that the game state has been changed (the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot in the first embodiment, and the first in the third embodiment. 3 external terminals 81c),
Recognizing control means (first embodiment) for setting the state of the recognizing means to a recognizable state where the identifying means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where recognizable is impossible. In the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 a function of executing the processing of step S413, step S511 and step S512, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S413 and step S2119 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
With
As a gaming state to be transferred after the specific gaming state, a case where a specific element (support mode) for changing an advantage degree is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous are set.
As a transition state of the gaming state including transition to the specific gaming state, a first transition mode in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state (e.g., explicit high likelihood winning result A) And the transition mode when the non-explicit high probability hit result A is set in the high frequency support mode)
When the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the recognition control means is after the timing in the middle of the specific gaming state and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. Setting means for setting to the recognizable state at the timing (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71, in the third embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 in the third embodiment). A game machine having a function of executing the process of step S2119.

  In the gaming machine having the feature C12, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition unit becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well. In addition, as a transition mode of the game state, the first transition mode in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific game state is set, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, when the game state transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing of the specific gaming state. Thereby, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes the first transition mode, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first transition mode is set as the gaming state transition mode. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily.

  In addition, for example, if the specific means recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting multiple types of gaming state transitions may be lost. Can be restricted.

  By applying the configuration limited to any one of the features A1 to A19 and the configuration limited to any one of the features B1 to C21 to any one of the features C1 to C12, A synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and the determination result of the transition determination means shift the gaming state. First transition means (main control device 71) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is terminated when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied based on the determination result corresponding to that. And the function of executing the processing of step S504 to step S511 in the MPU 92), and when the end condition is satisfied and the specific game state is ended, the game state is changed from the game state before the specific game state. Second transition means (function of executing transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71). Skill machine and (pachinko machine 10),
Acquire information from the gaming machine that makes it possible to recognize the status of the gaming state transition, and the specific response based on the result of the acquisition corresponding to the occurrence of the gaming state transition in the gaming machine Specific control means (a hall computer) that executes processing (step S1504 in the first embodiment, processing in steps S1705 and S1712 in the second embodiment, and processing in steps S2306 and S2310 in the third embodiment) HC)
In a gaming system comprising
The gaming machine has a mode in the specific gaming state and the specific gaming state as a transition mode in a case where a transition determination result in which the transition by both the first transition unit and the second transition unit is performed. Multiple types of transition modes are set so that at least one of the later transition modes is different,
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode among the plurality of types of transition modes, the specific control unit executes the specific handling process at a specific timing, while the transition of the gaming state is performed In the case of being performed in the second transition mode, response means that does not execute the specific response processing at the specific timing (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing in step S1504 in the MPU 201, in the second embodiment, A gaming system comprising a function for executing the processing of step S1705 and step S1712 in the MPU 201, and a function for executing the processing of step S2306 and step S2310 in the MPU 201 in the third embodiment.

  According to the feature D1, the specific handling process is executed by the specific control unit at a specific timing in the case of the first transition mode, while the specific handling process is executed at the specific timing in the case of the second transition mode. Not. As a result, it is possible to flexibly execute the specific handling process in the case of the first transition mode and the case of the second transition mode, and the first transition mode and the second transition mode are set as described above. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily.

  In addition, for example, when the specific handling process is executed in the specific control unit, the execution of the specific handling process is restricted in the case where there is a possibility that the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It becomes possible to do.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game well.

  It should be noted that the “specific timing” includes the start timing of the specific gaming state and the timing when the elapsed time from the start timing of the specific gaming state becomes the specific time, and the specific gaming device operates in the specific gaming state. The configuration includes a case where the predetermined number of operations of the gaming device is started or ended. In addition, in a configuration in which an opening period and an ending period are set in the specific gaming state, the timing during any one of these periods is included.

Feature D2. Informing means (data counter DC) provided corresponding to the gaming machine,
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the response unit performs the specific response process so that notification according to a predetermined mode is performed by the notification unit at the specific timing. When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the state where the notification according to the predetermined mode is not performed is maintained at the specific timing. The gaming system according to feature D1.

  According to the feature D2, according to the type of the game state transition mode, the notification execution timing and the presence / absence pattern of the notification in the predetermined mode in the notification unit are different. As a result, when the notification in the notification mode is performed in the notification means, the execution of the notification in the predetermined mode may be limited in the case where there is a possibility that the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It becomes possible.

  In addition, by not performing any notification in a predetermined manner in the notification means, for example, whether the manager of the game hall has illegal acts on the gaming machine through the content of the notification in the notification means Can be easily confirmed, and for example, the player can select a gaming machine in which he / she plays a game by referring to the content of the notification in the notification means.

  Feature D3. The specific control means confirms that the transition has been performed regardless of whether the game state transition is performed according to the first transition mode or the game state transition according to the second transition mode. Storage execution means (function to execute processing of step S1503 in the MPU 201 in the first embodiment, step S1802, step S1805 and step in the MPU 201 in the second embodiment) The game system according to Feature D2, further comprising a function of executing the process of S1808, a function of executing the processes of Steps S2303, S2305, and S2308 in the MPU 201 in the third embodiment.

  According to the feature D3, the administrator of the game hall confirms the management data even if the configuration of the feature D2 is provided and the notification execution timing and the presence / absence pattern of the notification in the notification unit are different. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the state of the game state transition. Thereby, it is possible to improve the gaming machine management in the gaming hall while not losing the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes.

Feature D4. The gaming machine is
A means for recognition (external terminal board 81) used for causing the specific control means to recognize that the game state has been changed;
Recognizing control means for controlling the recognizing means (in the second embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 performs a function of executing an external output setting process at the time of mode transition, and in the third embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main control device 71). In step S2011, step S2119, step S2206, and step S2208)
With
The recognizing control unit controls the recognizing unit to be in a predetermined recognizable state when the specific gaming state is started when the gaming state transition mode is the first transition mode. When the game state transition mode is the second transition mode, control is performed so that the recognition means is in a predetermined recognizable state when the specific game state is started.
The handling unit performs the specific handling process based on an acquisition result of information through the recognition unit,
Based on the fact that the recognizing means is in the predetermined recognizable state, the storage executing means transfers the game state regardless of whether the game state transition mode is the first transition mode or the second transition mode. The game system according to feature D3, wherein information indicating a start timing of the game is stored in the storage means as the management data.

  According to the feature D4, the administrator of the game hall confirms the management data even if the configuration of the feature D2 is provided and the notification execution timing and the presence / absence pattern of the notification in the notification unit are different. This makes it possible to grasp the start timing of the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to manage the execution state of the specific gaming state satisfactorily while preventing the effects of setting a plurality of types of transition modes from being lost.

Feature D5. The first transition mode is a mode in which a specific advantage is advantageous in the specific game state or in the game state thereafter.
The second transition aspect is an aspect in which the specific advantage is disadvantageous,
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the response means performs the specific response process at the specific timing before the situation where the specific advantage is advantageous is started. On the other hand, when the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the state of not executing the specific handling process is maintained even when the specific timing is reached. The gaming system according to any one of features D1 to D4.

  According to the feature D5, the specific response process is not performed uniformly but flexibly according to the content of the specific advantage degree of the migration destination. As a result, while the management of a situation where a specific advantage level is advantageous in a game hall or the like can be performed satisfactorily, for example, the execution of the management is caused by the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

Feature D6. The first transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, a transition is made to the first gaming state in which a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous,
The second transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state in which the specific element is relatively disadvantageous,
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the handling means executes the specific handling process at the specific timing before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. When the game state transition is performed in the second transition mode, the state of not executing the specific handling process is maintained even when the specific timing is reached. The gaming system according to any one of D4.

  According to the feature D6, the specific response processing is not performed uniformly but flexibly according to the game state after the specific game state. As a result, the management of the gaming state after the specific gaming state can be performed satisfactorily in a gaming hall or the like, but the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes, for example, is lost due to the execution of the management. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

  Note that the specific element may be configured to recognize that the element is advantageous from the operation of the gaming machine.

  The configuration newly limited by the feature A4 may be applied to the feature D5. In this case, a synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature D7. In the gaming machine, the aspect of the specific gaming state includes an aspect in which a predetermined benefit is expected to be relatively high (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a relatively low aspect (short-term aspect). Is set,
The specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode proceed in the relatively low mode and the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation is the first transition mode and the second mode. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be identified or difficult to identify which of the transition modes is generated from the start timing,
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the response means is after the transition to the first gaming state is performed after the low identification section is started. While the specific response process is executed at a specific timing, when the game state transition is performed in the second transition mode, the state in which the specific response process is not executed is maintained even when the specific timing is reached. The game system according to Feature D6, wherein

  According to the feature D7, it is difficult to recognize whether a specific element is advantageous or unfavorable after the specific gaming state in the low identification section of the specific gaming state. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be advantageous later. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the specific correspondence processing is not executed until at least halfway timing in the low identification section, for example, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to gaming machine management by the specific control means. . In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the specific correspondence processing is not executed, Problems are difficult to occur. Furthermore, if the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state, the specific response process is executed before the transition to the first gaming state is performed, so whether or not the specific element is advantageous. This can be managed satisfactorily.

Feature D8. The gaming machine is
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
Further, as a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means in the open state High expectation mode (long-term mode or medium-time mode) and low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so that is relatively high and low,
In the specific game state in the first transition mode and the specific game state in the second transition mode, the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed as a section from a start timing to at least an intermediate timing. And a low discrimination section in which it is difficult to identify or difficult to discriminate between the first transition mode and the second transition mode in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitching means. Has been
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the response means is after the transition to the first gaming state is performed after the low identification section is started. While the specific response process is executed at a specific timing, when the game state transition is performed in the second transition mode, the state in which the specific response process is not executed is maintained even when the specific timing is reached. The game system according to Feature D6, wherein

  According to the feature D8, since it is difficult to recognize whether a specific element is advantageous or unfavorable after the specific gaming state in the low identification section of the specific gaming state, the player can recognize the specific gaming state in the low identification section. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be advantageous later. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the specific correspondence processing is not executed until at least halfway timing in the low identification section, for example, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to gaming machine management by the specific control means. . In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the specific response processing is not executed, there is a problem in the management of the game machine's exit. Is difficult to occur. Furthermore, if the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state, the specific response process is executed before the transition to the first gaming state is performed, so whether or not the specific element is advantageous. This can be managed satisfactorily.

The specific game state includes a round game that is controlled to be terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches an upper limit number, and further, the round game In a configuration in which a specific game state corresponding to a round game that is terminated based on execution of a predetermined upper limit number of times is set,
In the high expectation mode, the upper limit number of game balls are likely to enter the variable pitching means to be controlled during the variable pitch control according to the mode. Whereas it is an aspect
In the low expectation mode, during the period when the variable pitch control according to the mode is being performed, the upper limit number of game balls have not entered into the variable pitch means that is the control target, or It is good also as a structure which is an aspect which is hard to generate | occur | produce.

  In order to clearly distinguish the ease of entering the game ball from the low expectation mode and the high expectation mode, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of variable entry control is in the open state May be set to a period shorter than the launch period of the game balls. Also, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target for variable entry control is in the open state is a period that is equal to or greater than the launch period of the game balls, and the launch period of the game balls × n (n is greater than the upper limit number) It is good also as a structure set to the following period. Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the n may be any number of “1”, “2”, or “3”.

Feature D9. The gaming machine has a low identification effect of an aspect that is visually indistinguishable or difficult to identify whether it is the specific gaming state according to the first transition aspect or the specific gaming state according to the second transition aspect. Production control means (function and display control device 111 for performing the effect determination processing for the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) is performed by the production execution means (the symbol display device 41) in the low identification section And
In the case where the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the response means is after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the specific response process is executed at the timing, when the game state transition is performed in the second transition mode, the state in which the specific response process is not executed even when the specific timing is reached The gaming system according to Feature D8, wherein

  According to the feature D9, it is difficult to recognize whether the specific element is advantageous or unfavorable after the specific gaming state in the situation where the low discrimination effect is performed. The game is played while visually recognizing the mode and the low identification effect and expecting an advantageous state after the specific game state. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the specific response process is not executed in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is not lost due to the gaming machine management by the specific control means. In addition, while the low identification effect is being performed, since the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is a relatively low section, even if the specific correspondence processing is not executed, Difficult to occur in managing the ball. Furthermore, if a specific element is advantageous after a specific gaming state, the specific response process is executed after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. The management of whether or not these elements are advantageous can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature D10. The specific handling process is a process that is executed in response to the transition to the specific gaming state.
Further, the specific control means executes special processing in response to the transition to the first gaming state after the specific gaming state as the execution target of the specific handling processing is completed. (In the first embodiment, the MPU 201 executes the process of step S1511. In the second embodiment, the MPU 201 executes the process of step S1718. In the third embodiment, the MPU 201 executes the process of step S2314. The game system according to any one of features D6 to D9, wherein the game system includes a function).

  According to the feature D10, the specific control means executes processing corresponding to each of the transition to the specific gaming state and the transition to the first specific gaming state. It is possible to manage whether or not it is in a gaming state, and it is possible to manage whether or not the transition to the first gaming state has been performed without triggering the end of the specific gaming state It becomes.

  In the configuration as described above, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, the special processing is not performed in any transition mode. When executed, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, the configuration of the feature D6 is provided, and when the transition to the first gaming state is performed after the specific gaming state, the specific handling process is executed in advance, so that the management can be performed satisfactorily. .

  The configuration newly limited by the feature A9 or A10 may be applied to any one of the features D1 to D10. In this case, a synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature D11. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively high (a long time mode or a medium time mode) and a mode in which a relatively low mode (a short time mode) is set,
As a determination result of the transition determination means, the transition to the specific gaming state in the relatively low mode occurs, but when the specific gaming state ends, the same game state as the gaming state before the specific gaming state The partial transition result (special outage result) that returns to the state is set,
The specific control means does not execute the specific handling process when a game state shift occurs based on the partial shift result.
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the mode in the specific gaming state based on the fact that the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation from the start timing of the specific gaming state to at least halfway timing is the partial transition result. Or it is configured to produce a low discrimination section that is difficult to identify,
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the response means maintains a state in which the specific response process is not executed at least until a predetermined timing after the low identification section is started. The gaming system according to any one of features D1 to D10, wherein:

  According to the feature D11, by setting the partial transition result, the specific gaming state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the granting rate of the privilege to the player and suppressing the influence on the transition rate of the gaming state excluding the specific gaming state. It is possible to use the transition to as an effect. Also, in the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, the specific gaming state based on the partial transition result is configured to generate a low identification section that cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. A game is played while predicting whether a game state transition will occur. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the specific correspondence process is not executed until at least halfway in the low identification section, the gaming machine management by the specific control means does not lose the effect of setting the low identification section. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the specific correspondence processing is not executed, Problems are difficult to occur.

Feature D12. The gaming machine is
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
Further, as a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means in the open state High expectation mode (long-term mode or medium-time mode) and low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so that
As a determination result of the transition determination means, when the transition to the specific gaming state that ends after the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed a specific number of times occurs, but the specific gaming state ends A partial transition result (special outage result) that returns to the same gaming state as the gaming state before the specific gaming state is set,
The specific control means does not execute the specific handling process when a game state shift occurs based on the partial shift result.
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the specific gaming state mode based on the fact that the operation mode of the variable pitching means from the start timing of the specific gaming state to at least halfway timing is the partial transition result or It is configured to produce a low discrimination section that is difficult to identify,
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the response means maintains a state in which the specific response process is not executed at least until a predetermined timing after the low identification section is started. The gaming system according to any one of features D1 to D10, wherein:

  According to the feature D12, by setting the partial transition result, the specific gaming state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the granting rate of the privilege for the player and suppressing the influence on the transition rate of the gaming state excluding the specific gaming state. It is possible to use the transition to as an effect. Also, in the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, the specific gaming state based on the partial transition result is configured to generate a low identification section that cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. A game is played while predicting whether a game state transition will occur. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  Further, since the specific correspondence process is not executed until at least halfway timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to gaming machine management by the specific control means. In addition, the low identification section is a section in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, so even if the specific response processing is not performed, there is a problem in the game management of the game machine. Is difficult to occur.

Feature D13. The gaming machine has a low identification effect of a mode in which it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify whether it is the specific gaming state according to the partial transition result or the specific gaming state according to the second transition mode. Production control means (function to execute presentation determination processing for the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111) to be performed by the production execution means (the symbol display device 41) in the identification section is provided. ,
When the game state transition is performed in the second transition mode, the response means maintains a state in which the specific response process is not executed at least until the low identification effect ends. The gaming system according to Feature D12.

  According to the feature D13, since the specific correspondence process is not executed in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the gaming machine management by the specific control means. There is nothing. In addition, while the low identification effect is being performed, since the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is a relatively low section, even if the specific correspondence processing is not executed, Difficult to occur in managing the ball.

Feature D14. The gaming machine is
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means determines that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion, and performs the determination based on the condition. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The second transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the low-frequency switching mode is set. And
When the game state transition is performed in the second transition mode, the response means does not execute the specific response process triggered by the game state transition. The gaming system according to D12 or D13.

  While the type of transition judgment mode can be made indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate in the appearance of the gaming machine, the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is changed. It is difficult to recognize which mode it is. Under such circumstances, in the feature D14, the transition determination mode is changed across the specific game state, but in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the low frequency switching mode, the specific response process triggered by that is performed. Not executed. Thereby, when a specific gaming state having a low identification section occurs, it is possible to continue the player's sense of expectation not only in the low identification section but also after the specific gaming state.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature D15. The gaming machine is
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific entrance portion (function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
With
The transition determination means determines that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion, and performs the determination based on the condition. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
In the second transition mode, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from a mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the high-frequency switching mode is set. And
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the second transition mode, the response means is after the low identification section is started and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. The game system according to Feature D12 or D13, wherein the specific handling process is executed at the timing of.

  While the type of transition judgment mode can be made indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate in the appearance of the gaming machine, the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is changed. It is difficult to recognize which mode it is. Under such circumstances, in the feature D15, the transition determination mode is changed across the specific gaming state, and in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the high-frequency switching mode, the game state after the specific gaming state is changed to the gaming state. The specific response processing is executed at a timing before the migration is performed. This makes it possible to play a game while expecting an advantageous state after a specific game state in a low identification section, and also manages the frequency of entering a specific ball in the game hall and specifies it illegally. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor the act of trying to open the ball-entry unit.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature D16. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and the determination result of the transition determination means shift the gaming state. Based on the determination result corresponding to that, the state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) ), And a gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) having
Information for enabling recognition of the state of transition of the gaming state is acquired from the gaming machine, and the recognition result is based on the result corresponding to the occurrence of the transition of the gaming state in the gaming machine. Specific control means (Hall computer HC) for outputting
In a gaming system comprising
The gaming machine, as a transition mode when the determination result that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed, relative to the first section that proceeds in a mode in which the expected degree of grant of a predetermined privilege is relatively low, A specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of an explicit high probability hit result B) having a second section that proceeds in a highly expensive manner,
The specific control means recognizes that the recognition output is not performed in at least a part of the first section, and the recognition output is performed in at least a part of the second section. Output means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1504 in the MPU 201, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1705 and S1712 in the MPU 201, in the MPU 201 in the third embodiment (2) and a function for executing the processing of step S2310).

  According to the feature D16, the specific game state is controlled while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the predetermined privilege by setting the specific transition mode in which the first section and the second section are generated as the transition state of the game state. Can be used as an effect, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, the recognition output is not performed uniformly regardless of whether it is the first section or the second section, but the setting of the recognition output is switched depending on the staying section. . Thereby, when the transition state of the gaming state becomes a specific transition mode, the recognition output is flexibly performed, and the gaming machine management can be performed well in the configuration in which the specific transition mode is set. It becomes possible.

  The configuration newly limited in the feature B2 or B3 may be applied to the feature D16. In this case, a synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature D17. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and the determination result of the transition determination means shift the gaming state. Based on the determination result corresponding to that, the state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) ), And a gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) having
Acquire information from the gaming machine that makes it possible to recognize the status of the gaming state transition, and the specific response based on the result of the acquisition corresponding to the occurrence of the gaming state transition in the gaming machine Specific control means (a hall computer) that executes processing (step S1504 in the first embodiment, processing in steps S1705 and S1712 in the second embodiment, and processing in steps S2306 and S2310 in the third embodiment) HC)
In a gaming system comprising
In the gaming machine, the aspect of the specific gaming state includes an aspect in which a predetermined benefit is expected to be relatively high (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a relatively low aspect (short-term aspect). Is set and
The state transition means, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result (for example, the explicit high probability winning result B), the section that proceeds in the relatively low mode is at least from the start timing. A transition is made to the first specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B) that occurs over the middle of the timing,
When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the specific control unit is a response unit (MPU201 in the first embodiment) that delays the timing of executing the specific response process until after the timing in the middle of the section. Function for executing the process of step S1504 in the second embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1705 and step S1712 in the MPU 201 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2306 and step S2310 in the MPU 201 in the third embodiment. A gaming system characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D17, the first specific gaming state in which the section that progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting the predetermined privilege is relatively low from the start timing to the middle timing is set. It is possible to use the execution of the specific gaming state as an effect while suppressing the influence on the grant rate of the bonus, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the specific response process is not executed from the start timing, but the execution timing is delayed. As a result, when transitioning to the first specific gaming state, the specific response processing is flexibly performed according to the progress status, and the first specific gaming state is set as the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to manage the gaming machine satisfactorily.

  In addition, for example, when the specific handling process is executed in the specific control means, the execution of the specific handling process is restricted when there is a possibility that the effect of setting the first specific gaming state may be lost. It becomes possible to do.

Feature D18. Informing means (data counter DC) provided corresponding to the gaming machine,
The specific control means acquires information from the gaming machine that makes it possible to recognize the status of the gaming state transition, and the acquisition result is a result corresponding to the occurrence of the gaming state transition in the gaming machine. Based on the above, the specific handling process is executed so that the notification according to a predetermined mode is performed in the notification means,
When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the response means delays the timing of executing the specific response processing so that the notification according to the predetermined mode is not performed until after the timing in the middle of the section. The game system according to Feature D17, wherein the game system is a thing.

  According to the feature D18, when transitioning to the first specific gaming state, the notification execution timing in the predetermined mode in the notification unit is delayed. Thereby, when the notification in the predetermined mode is performed in the notification means, it is possible to limit the execution of the notification in the predetermined mode in a case where the effect of setting the first specific gaming state may be lost. It becomes.

  In addition, by not performing any notification in a predetermined manner in the notification means, for example, whether the manager of the game hall has illegal acts on the gaming machine through the content of the notification in the notification means Can be easily confirmed, and for example, the player can select a gaming machine in which he / she plays a game by referring to the content of the notification in the notification means.

  Feature D19. When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the specific control unit stores information indicating the start timing of the transition in the storage unit (RAM 203) as management data (second implementation) In the embodiment, the MPU 201 has a function of executing the processing of Step S1802, Step S1805, and Step S1808, and in the third embodiment, the MPU 201 has a function of executing the processing of Step S2303). Game system.

  According to the feature D19, even if the configuration of the feature D18 is provided and the execution timing of the notification in the predetermined mode in the notification unit is delayed when the transition to the first specific gaming state is made, It becomes possible for the administrator of this to grasp the start timing of the first specific gaming state by checking the management data. Thereby, it is possible to satisfactorily manage the execution status of the first specific gaming state while not losing the effect of setting the first specific gaming state.

Feature D20. The gaming machine is
A means for recognition (external terminal board 81) used for causing the specific control means to recognize that the game state has been changed;
Recognition control means for controlling the recognition means (in the second embodiment, a function of executing an external output setting process at the time of mode transition in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
With
The recognizing control means controls the recognizing means to be in a predetermined recognizable state when the first specific gaming state is started when the first specific gaming state is entered.
The response unit is configured to execute the specific response process when a predetermined delay period has elapsed from a timing when the recognition unit recognizes that the predetermined recognition is possible. The gaming system according to feature D18 or D19.

  According to the feature D20, the execution of the notification in a predetermined mode corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state can be delayed to a preferable timing while the start timing of the first specific game state can be recognized by the specific control means. it can. Therefore, through the recognition means being in a predetermined recognizable state, it is possible to achieve both good execution management of the first specific gaming state in the specific control means and execution at a good timing of notification of the predetermined mode in the notification means. It becomes possible to plan.

Feature D21. In the gaming machine, as the transition state of the gaming state triggered by the first determination result, the gaming content related to the grant of privilege is changed after the first section that proceeds in the relatively low mode. The specific mode in which the second section occurs is set,
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the specific mode, the response means executes the specific response process after the timing in the middle of the first section and before the end of the second section. The gaming system according to any one of features D17 to D20, wherein:

  According to the feature D21, the specific correspondence process is executed flexibly according to the game content related to the grant of the privilege, and the first section is the transition state of the game state triggered by the first determination result. In the configuration in which the second section and the second section are set, gaming machine management can be performed satisfactorily. In addition, for example, even if specific processing is not executed, it is difficult to cause a problem in gaming machine management. In the first section, importance is placed on improving the degree of attention of the game, and the gaming machine management is favorable in the second section. Can be performed.

Feature D22. The first specific gaming state is configured such that a second section that proceeds in the relatively high mode is generated after the first section that continues in the relatively low mode.
When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the response unit executes the specific response process after the timing in the middle of the first section and before the end of the second section. The gaming system according to any one of features D17 to D21, characterized in that:

  According to the feature D22, the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state by performing the specific response process flexibly depending on whether or not the expected degree of granting the predetermined privilege is high. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management well. Also, for example, in the first section where it is difficult to cause a problem in gaming machine management even if the specific handling process is not executed, emphasis is placed on improving the degree of attention of the game, and the expected degree of granting a predetermined privilege is relatively When a high second section occurs, gaming machine management can be performed favorably.

  Feature D23. As the specific handling process, the handling unit stores, in the storage unit (RAM 203), information capable of recognizing the timing at which the second section is executed by the manager of the game hall as management data (first storage unit). In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1503 in the MPU 201, the function of executing the processing of step S1802, step S1805, and step S1808 in the MPU 201 in the second embodiment, and in step S2305 and step S2308 in the MPU 201 in the third embodiment. The game system according to the feature D22, wherein the game system is provided with a function of executing the process (2).

  According to the feature D23, the manager of the game hall can grasp the number of occurrences and the occurrence timing of the second section by checking the management data. Thereby, it becomes possible to distinguish and manage the first section and the second section.

Feature D24. The state transition means shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. Based on the fact that (for example, the explicit high probability winning result A or the special outage result) is obtained, the second specific gaming state (for example, the pattern A of the pattern A) in which the relatively low aspect continues at least halfway from the start timing. Open / close execution mode)
The first specific game state and the second specific game state proceed in the relatively low mode, and the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation is any of the first specific game state and the second specific game state. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be identified or difficult to identify is generated from the start timing,
When the transition to the second specific gaming state is performed, the response means maintains a state where the specific response processing is not executed at least until a specific timing after the low identification section is started, and When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the specific correspondence process is executed after the specific timing and before the end of the second section. The gaming system according to any one of D23.

  According to the feature D24, a game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the specific correspondence process is not executed at least until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the gaming machine management by the specific control means. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of granting a predetermined privilege is low, even if the specific correspondence processing is not executed, a problem occurs in gaming machine management It ’s hard. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, since the specific correspondence process is executed before the end of the second section, it is possible to manage well whether or not it is the second section.

Feature D25. The gaming machine is
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
Further, as a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means in the open state High expectation mode (long-term mode or medium-time mode) and low expectation mode (short-time mode) are set so that is relatively high and low,
The first zone is a zone where the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed, and the second zone is a zone where the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode is performed. The gaming system according to any one of features D17 to D24.

  According to the feature D25, it is possible to perform an effect through the operation of the variable pitching means in the first section, and it is possible to give a privilege through the operation of the variable pitching means in the second section. Thereby, diversification of the game in a specific game state is achieved using the variable pitching means. In this case, by including the configuration such as the feature D17, the specific response process can be executed flexibly depending on whether the operation of the variable pitching means is used as an effect or for the purpose of giving a privilege. As a result, the gaming machine management can be performed well in the configuration in which the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state. Further, for example, in the first section where the presentation is performed through the operation of the variable pitching means, emphasis is placed on improving the degree of attention of the game, and in the second section where the frequency of giving a privilege to the player is improved, the gaming machine management Can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature D26. The state transition means shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. The second specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A) in which the relatively low mode continues for at least halfway from the start timing based on (for example, the explicit high probability winning result A). To be transferred to
The first specific game state and the second specific game state proceed by performing the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode, and the first specific game state in terms of the operation of the variable pitch means. It is configured such that a low identification section is generated from a start timing when it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify which state is related to the state and the second specific gaming state,
When the transition to the second specific gaming state is performed, the response means maintains a state where the specific response processing is not executed at least until a specific timing after the low identification section is started, and When the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed, the specific corresponding process is executed after the specific timing and before the end of the second section. The described gaming system.

  According to the feature D26, a game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  Further, since the specific correspondence processing is not executed until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to gaming machine management. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the specific response processing is not executed, there is a problem in the management of the game machine's exit. Is difficult to occur. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, since the specific correspondence process is executed before the end of the second section, it is possible to manage well whether or not it is the second section.

Feature D27. The gaming machine performs an effect execution means (symbol display) in the low identification section in a low identification effect of an aspect that is visually unidentifiable or difficult to identify whether it is the first specific game state or the second specific game state. Device 41) is provided with effect control means (function to execute effect determination processing for the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111),
When the transition to the second specific gaming state is performed, the response means maintains a state in which the specific response processing is not executed at least until the low identification effect ends, and the first specific gaming state The game according to Feature D26, wherein when the transition to is performed, the specific corresponding process is executed after the end of the low identification effect and before the end of the second section. system.

  According to the feature D27, the effect of setting the low identification section can be further enhanced by performing the low identification effect in the low identification section. In this case, since the specific response process is not executed in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the gaming machine management by the specific control means. Absent. In addition, while the low identification effect is being performed, since the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is a relatively low section, even if the specific correspondence processing is not executed, Difficult to occur in managing the ball. Furthermore, in the case of the second section, since the specific correspondence process is executed before the end of the second section, it is possible to manage well whether or not it is the second section.

Feature D28. The gaming machine is set as a gaming state that shifts after the specific gaming state, when a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous and when it is disadvantageous. And
As a transition state of the game state including the transition to the second specific game state, a predetermined transition mode is set in which the specific element shifts to the advantageous game state after the second specific game state. ,
In the case where the transition of the gaming state is performed in the predetermined transition mode, the handling means executes the specific handling process before the start timing of the gaming state where the specific element is advantageous. A gaming system according to feature D24, D26 or D27, characterized by

  According to the feature D28, in the low identification section, the game is performed while predicting whether the second section will occur or a gaming state in which a specific element is advantageous, and attention to the game It becomes possible to increase the degree. In addition, when a specific element is advantageous after the second specific gaming state, whether or not the specific element is advantageous because the specific response processing is executed before the transition to the gaming state is performed. This can be managed satisfactorily.

Feature D29. The gaming machine is
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means is configured to perform the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific entrance portion,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
Further, as a transition state of the gaming state including transition to the second specific gaming state, a predetermined transition mode for transitioning to the gaming state that becomes the high-frequency switching mode after the second specific gaming state is set,
In the case where the transition of the gaming state is performed in the predetermined transition mode, the handling means executes the specific handling process before the gaming state start timing to be the high-frequency switching mode. The gaming system according to feature D24, D26 or D27.

  According to the feature D29, in the low identification section, the game is performed while predicting whether the second section will occur or the gaming state in which the high-frequency switching mode is to occur, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. It becomes possible. In addition, when the game state is shifted to the high-frequency switching mode after the second specific gaming state, the specific response process is executed before the transition to the gaming state is performed, so that the gaming state is set. Whether or not it is possible to manage well.

  In particular, management of the frequency of entering the specific entrance in the game hall and monitoring of attempts to illegally open the specific entrance by performing specific response processing in relation to the switching mode, etc. Can be performed satisfactorily. In addition, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is made different, it is easy for the player to recognize which is the switching mode. Therefore, when the game mode is changed to the high-frequency switching mode. Even if the specific handling process is executed, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature D30. The specific handling process is a process that is executed in response to the transition to the specific gaming state.
Further, the specific control means executes a special process in response to the transition to the gaming state that becomes the high-frequency switching mode after the specific gaming state that is the execution target of the specific handling process has ended. Special process execution means (function of executing step S1511 in the MPU 201 in the first embodiment, function of executing the process of step S1718 in the MPU 201 in the second embodiment, step S2314 of the MPU 201 in the third embodiment The game system according to Feature D29, further comprising a function for executing a process.

  According to the feature D30, in the specific control means, processing is executed in correspondence with each of the transition to the specific gaming state and the transition to the gaming state that becomes the high-frequency switching mode. Therefore, it is possible to manage whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state, and manage whether or not the transition to the high-frequency switching mode has been performed without triggering the end of the specific gaming state. It becomes possible.

  In the configuration as described above, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, if the specific correspondence process is not executed in any specific gaming state, When special processing is executed, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, after the second specific gaming state, when the game state is shifted to the high-frequency switching mode, the specific response processing is executed in advance, so that the above management can be performed satisfactorily. be able to.

Feature D31. The second specific gaming state is set so that the mode after the low identification section is different from the case of the first specific gaming state,
The response means is configured to execute the specific response processing when the same delay period has elapsed in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state. A gaming system according to any one of D26 to D30.

  According to the feature D31, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the processing related to the setting of the delay period.

Feature D32. The second determination result is that the transition to the second specific gaming state according to the relatively low aspect occurs, but the gaming state before the second specific gaming state when the second specific gaming state ends. Is a determination result that will return to the same gaming state,
The specific control means does not execute the specific response processing triggered by the transition of the gaming state when the second determination result is obtained, The feature D24, D26, or D27 is characterized in that Gaming system.

  According to the feature D32, it is possible to flexibly execute the specific handling process according to the transition state of the gaming state.

Feature D33. Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) and the determination result of the transition determination means shift the gaming state. Based on the determination result corresponding to that, the state transition means for shifting the game state to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) ), And a gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) having
Acquire information from the gaming machine that makes it possible to recognize the status of the gaming state transition, and the specific response based on the result of the acquisition corresponding to the occurrence of the gaming state transition in the gaming machine Specific control means (a hall computer) that executes processing (step S1504 in the first embodiment, processing in steps S1705 and S1712 in the second embodiment, and processing in steps S2306 and S2310 in the third embodiment) HC)
In a gaming system comprising
The gaming machine is
As a gaming state to be transferred after the specific gaming state, a case where a specific element (support mode) for changing an advantage degree is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous are set.
As a transition state of the gaming state including transition to the specific gaming state, a first transition mode in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state (e.g., explicit high likelihood winning result A) And the transition mode when the non-explicit high probability hit result A is set in the high frequency support mode)
When the transition of the gaming state is performed in the first transition mode, the specific control means performs the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state after the timing in the middle of the specific gaming state. Corresponding means for executing the specific handling process at the previous timing (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1504 in the MPU 201, the function of executing the processes of step S1705 and step S1712 in the MPU 201 in the second embodiment) In the third embodiment, the MPU 201 has a function of executing the processing of steps S2306 and S2310).

  According to the feature D33, as the transition state of the game state, the first transition mode in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific game state is set, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased. Enhanced.

  In this case, when the game state transition mode is the first transition mode, the specific response process is not executed from the start timing of the specific game state, but the execution timing is delayed. Thereby, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes the first transition mode, the specific response processing is flexibly performed according to the progress status, and the first transition mode is set as the transition mode of the gaming state. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management well.

  Further, for example, when the specific control process is executed in the specific control means, the specific response process is executed when there is a possibility that the effect of setting the first transition mode as the game mode transition mode may be lost. Can be restricted.

  Note that a configuration newly limited by any one of the features D1 to D32 may be applied to the feature D33. In this case, the synergistic effect by having applied these each structure can be show | played.

  Feature D34. Recognizing means (external terminal board 81) used to make the specific control means recognize that the game state has been changed, and recognition controlling means (MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the recognizing means. And a game system that is applied to the game system according to any one of features D1 to D33.

  It is possible to provide a gaming machine that enables the construction of a gaming system that exhibits the operational effects described in any one of the features D1 to D33.

  According to each feature described above, the following problems can be solved.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine performs a lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition has been established, and if the lottery result is a predetermined result, a game state transition such as a transition to a jackpot state is performed. Occur. In addition, in order to be able to perform gaming machine management in a gaming hall, a configuration is known in which information for causing a gaming machine to recognize its own gaming state is output to a gaming hall management computer or the like.

  For example, when the gaming machine outputs a signal indicating that it is in a big hit state, the management computer can recognize that the gaming machine is in the big hit state. Then, when an illegal act that causes a large amount of game media to be paid out is performed, a game hall indicates that a large amount of game media is being paid out even though a signal indicating that a big hit state has not been made. It is possible for the administrator to recognize this, and it is possible to prevent the cheating from being continued for a long period of time.

  In addition, for example, there is a known game hall in which counter displays are arranged in parallel for each gaming machine, and the number of transitions such as a jackpot state is displayed in a counter in accordance with the signal output from the gaming machine. It is made to notify by a vessel. In this case, the player can select a gaming machine in which he / she plays with reference to the contents notified by the counter display.

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game. As one method, it is conceivable to improve the transition state of the gaming state. However, when trying to improve the transition state of the gaming state while using the conventional configuration as it is for the signal output to the game hall, at least one of the management of the gaming machine through the signal output and the improvement of the degree of attention to the game There are concerns that problems may arise.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable winning device, 32a ... Large winning opening, 34 ... Lower operation opening, 41 ... Symbol display device, 51 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 71 ... Main control device, 72 ... Voice light emission control device, 77 ... Dispensing device constituting privilege granting means, 78 ... Dispensing control device constituting privilege granting means, 81 ... External terminal plate as recognition means, 92 ... MPU, 102 ... MPU, 111 ... Display control device, DC ... data Counter, HC ... Hall computer.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and a specific entrance part configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a determination result corresponding to shifting the gaming state, state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state;
A recognition means used to make the management means outside the gaming machine recognize that the transition of the gaming state has been performed;
Recognizing control means for setting the state of the recognizing means to a recognizable state or recognizable non-recognizable state in which the management means can recognize that the game state transition has been performed;
With
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The state transition means includes
When the determination result of the transition determination unit is the first determination result, the expectation degree is relatively high after the first section in which the expectation degree of granting the predetermined privilege proceeds in a relatively low aspect. Means for transitioning the gaming state to the first specific gaming state in which the proceeding second section occurs;
Means for shifting the gaming state to a second specific gaming state in which the first section of the first section and the second section occurs when the determination result of the transition determining means is a second determination result;
With
When the second determination result is obtained in the low frequency switching mode, the switching mode after the second specific gaming state is the low frequency switching mode, and when the second determination result is obtained in the high frequency switching mode, The switching mode after the second specific gaming state is configured to be the high-frequency switching mode,
The recognition control means includes
When the determination result of the transition determination means is the first determination result, the recognition is disabled in at least part of the first section, and the recognition is enabled in at least part of the second section. Means for controlling the means for recognition;
Means for controlling the recognition means so that the unrecognizable state is continued when the determination result of the transition determination means in the low frequency switching mode is the second determination result;
When the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result in the high-frequency switching mode, the recognition is disabled in at least a part of the first section until the second specific gaming state is ended. Means for controlling the means for recognition so as to be in a recognizable state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images